MF X-1200/1600
Plain-paper digital Fax/ Copier/ Printer
Operating Instructions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We lcom e
Th a n k you !
Thanks for selecting a Muratec fax machine for your
business.
Befor e you begin , please note that before your fax can be
used and before you can turn on power to the unit for the
first time, there are important precautions to take. Please
see page 1.5 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
Muratec, the Muratec logo and all Muratec fax product names contained herein are
trademarks of Muratec America, Inc.
ENERGY STAR is a registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection
Agency.
Copyright
Copyright ' 2000 by Muratec America, Inc, All rights reserved.
As an Energy Starfi partner, Muratec America, Inc., has deter-
mined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for
energy efficiency.
Energy saving
Your machine can save the energy with its Energy Saving Mode.
In the Energy Saving Mode the printer will not use its fusing lamp and Energy Save
Mode will be displayed on the LCD. If your machine receives a fax message or if any
key is pressed your machine will automatically wake up.
The time for the machine to enter the Energy saving mode can be selected from 1 to
120 minutes. For details, see Setting sleep mode, page 4.10.
Super G3 is an extension of Group 3 fax technology standards,
allowing the use of high-speed ITU-T V.34 bis modems for 33.6
Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid handshak-
ing.
J BIG
Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T stan-
dard image data compression method. As J BIG compresses the
data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when
transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.
Note: Super G3 and J BIG are available only for MFX-1600.
This manual and any updates to it can be found online at w w w.m u r a tec.com
Go to the Products section of this site, then click on MFX-1200/ 1600
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before using your Muratec fax machine
Clea n
Where to set up your fax machine
Dust buildup can damage your fax. Periodically
clean your fax machine as described in the operating
instructions. Do n ot u se a d u st cover, which can
cause damaging overheating.
Follow these guidelines when setting up your fax machine:
Aw a y fr om d ir ect su n ligh t
To avoid overheating, set up your fax machine away
from direct sunlight or a heater.
Nea r a p h on e ja ck
Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) tele-
phone jack, also known as an RJ -11.
Level, a n d vibr a tion -fr ee
To avoid damage to the machine or injuries, set the
fax machine up in a level, vibration-free location.
Sp a ce a r ou n d th e fa x m a ch in e
To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation, set
up the machine in an area that meets the minimum
requirements for clearance as illustrated below.
Avoid extr em e h igh / low tem p er a tu r e
Use your fax machine within the temperature range
of 50” F to 89.6” F (10” C to 32” C).
50 - 89.6 F
(
)
10 - 32 C
60 cm
(23.6 inches)
15 cm
(5.9 inches)
25 cm
(9.8 inches)
Aw a y fr om a television or r a d io
Many appliances and office equipment, including
televisions, radios, copy machines, air conditioners
and computers, can generate electronic noise that
can interfere with the operation of your fax
machine.
40 cm
40 cm
(15.7 inches)
(15.7 inches)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power requirements
General Precautions
P lu g in th e p ow er cor d
Never d isa ssem ble you r fa x m a ch in e!
Plug the power cord carefully and completely into a
wall outlet. Do not leave any portion of the electrical
cord s metal plugs exposed. Doing so could cause a
fire and poses a risk of electrical shock.
Disassembling your fax machine can cause serious
injury to you and damage to your fax. If service is
required, call your authorized Muratec dealer.
Do n ot sh a r e a n exten sion cor d
con n ector w ith oth er p lu gs
It can cause electrical shock.
Keep a w a y fr om liqu id s
Keep liquids and metal pins or other objects away
from your fax machine. If something falls into the
fax machine, remove the plug from the outlet, and
call your authorized Muratec dealer.
Never h a n d le you r fa x m a ch in e or
p ow er cor d w ith w et h a n d s
Never touch your fax machine or power cord if your
hands are wet.
Do n ot sh a r e a n ou tlet w ith a la r ge
a p p lia n ce
High-consumption appliances such as a refrigerator
or air conditioner can cause dr aw-downs which
could damage your fax machine.
Du r in g electr ica l stor m s, d iscon n ect
th e p lu g fr om th e ou tlet
Electrical storms can cause electrical shock or
damage to the fax machine.
120 VAC ou tlet
Use a standard three-pronged 120 V electrical outlet
to power your fax machine. Using any other electri-
cal outlet will cause damage to your fax.
AC 120V
For d om estic u se on ly
Never use your fax machine outside the country in
which you purchased it. Doing so may violate
telecommunication and safety regulations of that
country, and variations in electrical and telephone
standards can cause poor performance and damage
to your fax.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do n ot p u t fu r n itu r e or equ ip m en t on
th e p ow er cor d
Do not put anything on or over the electrical power
cord, and do not route the power cord under rugs or
carpets. Doing so can damage the power cord or fax,
and can cause fire or electrical shock.
Storing and handling toner and drum cartridges
To avoid damage to your fax machine and to assure the best performance possible,
follow these guidelines when storing and handling toner and drum cartridges:
Stor e th e ca r tr id ge
Store the cartridge at a constant temperature within a range of 32” F to 95” F (0” C
to 35” C). To avoid dew do not store cartridges in locations subject to extreme fluctu-
ation of temperature and humidity.
Avoid tem p er a tu r e flu ctu a tion s
Sudden changes in temperature can cause damag-
ing condensation to form inside your fax machine.
Do n ot sta n d th e ca r tr id ge on its en d a n d d o n ot stor e it
u p sid e d ow n .
Do n ot op en th e p r otective ba g of th e ca r tr id ge u n til you a r e
r ea d y to in sta ll th e ca r tr id ge.
Allow clea r a n ce a r ou n d th e ou tlet
Don t stack boxes or furniture around the outlet.
Do n ot stor e ca r tr id ges in a r ea s of:
Direct sunlight
Dusty conditions
Near floppy disks or other computer media, computer screens, or any other mate-
rials sensitive to magnetic fields.
DO NOT BURN TONER CARTRIDGES!
The toner powder is extremely flammable. Exposure to
flame can cause toner cartridges to burn or explode,
causing serious injury.
Use ca u tion w h en ca r r yin g th e fa x
Lift and carry the fax machine as described in your
operating instructions. Some fax machines require
two people to safely and properly carry.
Be ca r efu l n ot to get th e ton er p ow d er in
you r eyes.
If the toner powder gets in your eyes, wash your eyes well
and see a doctor.
Use su p p lies m a n u fa ctu r ed
sp ecifica lly for Mu r a tec fa x m a ch in es
Using toner cartridges and other supplies that are
not manufactured specifically for Muratec machines
may affect the operation of your unit.
Keep ca r tr id ges a w a y fr om w a ter or oil.
Do n ot exp ose ca r tr id ges to d ir ect su n ligh t.
Do n ot exp ose th e ca r tr id ges to sta tic or
oth er electr ica l sh ock .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page intentionally blank.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Welcome to your Muratec fax machine!
These instructions are divided into the following sections.
Find your serial number and write it down
Ge t t in g st a r t e d (page 1.1) describes how to set up your
machine, operating tips and some important settings that you
should perform before you use your machine.
Please note that your machine s serial
number is located on the bar code label
as shown on the drawing at right. Use
the blank at the bottom of this column
to copy this down before you set up
your machine.
Ba sic op e r a t ion s (page 2.1) descrives the basic operations of
the transmission, reception and copying.
Ad va n ced fea t u r es (page 3.1) descrives the convenient features
of your machine.
Ch a n gin g t h e d efa u lt set t in gs (page 4.1) descrives how to
change the settings of your machine.
Bar code label
Finally, J u s t i n c a s e
(page 5.1) helps you if you ever have a
problem with your machine. It also tells you how to give your
machine the kind of easy, sensible care that should keep troubles to
a minimum.
Close up, the bar code label looks some-
thing like this, but with a different set of
numbers:
Thanks for choosing Muratec.
Please copy down your machine s serial number below for future reference, and note
the machine s model number:
My machine s serial number: ________________________________________
My machine s model number: q Muratec MFX-1200
q Muratec MFX-1600
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Getting started
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Answering calls manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
How to select the fax reception mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
If the paper runs out while fax reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Your machine s copier features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Basic copy procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Single copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Stacking multiple copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Sorting multiple copies (using ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Enlarged or reduced copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Using the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Memory overflow message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
If the paper runs out while copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Making copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Special copy function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Copy protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Dialing a telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
On-hook dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Changing the dialing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Dialing in the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Attaching an optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Attaching a second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Parts of your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Control Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Pick an installation spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Power tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Unlocking the mirror carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Attach the paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Plug in and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Turning off the transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Adjust the monitor speaker s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Changing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Turning off the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
How to operate the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Entering characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Searching the functions using the cursor key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Function table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
EasyStart (Initial settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Clearing stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Entering initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Basic Operations
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Memory overflow message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Real time transmission (Non-memory transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Sending a fax using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Sending a fax using the FBS glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Sending a fax using monitor/call key or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Reviewing or canceling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Advanced Features
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Autodialer basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Using one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Using speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Call group dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Making changes to broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Setting up a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Creating or modifying a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Storing a document for batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Erasing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Printing a stored polling document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Erasing a stored polling document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Limiting polling access to your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Setting the activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
OneLine + distinctive ring detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
The power of QuadAccessfi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
F-Code Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
The passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Setting Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
Using department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Changing redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Settings for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Copy scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Adjusting the copy print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Changing the copy auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Setting copy auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Setting Negative/Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Setting combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Settings for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Setting the silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Primary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Printer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Print the Demo Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Print the Printer Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Print PCL Font List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Print NIC status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Set TCP/IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Ju st in ca se
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
If an original document jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
If a printout jams inside your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
We re here to help you! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Changing the default settings
Settings for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
TTI transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Settings for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Setting the number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Settings for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Changing the dialing pause length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Appendix and index
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.3
Limited warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.4
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Function table
Level one function
A. Autodial Entries
Level two function
1.One-touch Dial
Level three function
Summary of setting
Default setting
Page
3.2
01.Enter One-Touch
(Max. 55 locations.)
Select one-touch key and register the fax dial numbers and names,
also group numbers on one-touch dial keys.
If you register the name, you can use the telephone index feature.
If you register the group number, you can use the group dialing.
02.Erase One-Touch
Erase the registration in a one-touch key.
3.3
3.5
2.Speed Dial
01.Enter Speed-Dial
(Max. 145 locations.)
Select speed-dial number and register the fax dial numbers and
names, also group numbers as Speed-Dial numbers.
If you register the name, you can use the telephone index feature.
If you register the group number, you can use the group dialing.
02.Erase Speed-Dial
01.Enter P One-Touch
Erase the registration in a speed-dial number.
3.6
3.Program One-Touch
1.Machine Settings
Program several operations for a function you frequently use.
This key can reduce several steps to a simple press of a key.
3.36
02.Erase P One-Touch
01.Cassette Size
02.Protect Passcode
03.Soft Key
Erase the programming in a programmable one-touch key.
Select the size of paper in the paper cassette.
3.49
1.9
B. User Settings
Letter
Enter the protection passcode for using the security features.
3.50
Program to turn on or off any functions with just pressing this key. Repor t
Mem or y Tx
3.17
Monitor/Call
04.Silent Mode
05.Sleep Mode
06.Fax & Copy
07.Primary Mode
08.Service Mode
Mute your machine.
Off
4.8
Conserve power.
On (30 min.)
Off
4.9
Make a copy of your document each time it transmit.
Determine the primary mode, Fax mode or Copy mode.
3.21
4.9
None
For technical support. Do not set this setting to on unless an
authorized technician asks you to do so.
Off
09.2-Bin Tray*1
Select the paper tray for delivery.
Copy exit
Lower tray
Upper tray
Upper tray
Upper tray
Received fax document exit
List exit
4.9
P C-Fax print exit*2
2.Fax Settings
01.Scan Parameters
02.Print Parameter
You can set the following settings for send fax message.
Primary resolution mode
Primary contrast mode
Normal
Normal
4.1
4.3
You can set the following settings for receive fax message.
Reduction rate
Reduction margin
Auto
40 mm
Off
Half-page reception
*1: This option appears only if the optional 2-Bin tray has been installed.
*2: This option appears only if the optional RS-232C interface has been installed.
1.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Page
Level one function
B. User Settings
Level two function
2.Fax Settings
Level three function
03.# of Rings
04.Redial
Summary of setting
Default setting
Two times
Number of rings before your machine answers.
Number of times and interval for automatic fax redialing.
4.4
Two times
One minute
4.5
05.Dialing Pause
06.Memory Tx
07.Quick Memory Tx
08.TTI Tx
Dialing pause length.
Two times
On
4.5
On/Off setting for Memory transmission.
On/Off setting for Quick Memory transmission.
On/Off setting for sending your TTI.
4.2
On
4.2
On
4.2
09.ECM Mode
10.Block Junk Fax
11.Security Rx
12.PIN Mode
On/Off setting for ECM mode.
On
4.1
Reject the fax reception from unauthorized incoming faxes.
Keep all received fax messages in memory and after print them.
Prevent unauthorized long-distance calls.
Enter passcode for limiting polling access.
Off
3.54
3.50
3.52
3.16
Off
Off
13.Passcode
14.Rotate Rx
(for MFX-1600 only)
On/Off setting for Rotate Rx.
Off
Off
4.4
14.DRD (for MFX-1200) Set the ring pattern to use with phone company s Distinctive Ring
15.DRD (for MFX-1600) service.
3.24
3.Copy Settings
01.Scan Parameters
You can set the following settings for copying.
Primary document type
Text
4.6
Primary contrast mode
Normal
02. Print parameter
03.Auto Reset Time
04.Copy Auto
You can set the margin for copying.
24 mm
4.6
4.7
Set the time (minutes) of resetting the copy parameters.
3 minutes
Set the default setting to Auto for one of the following:
Paper size Reduce/Enlarge ratio Document size
Paper size
4.7
05.Copy Protect
06.Sort Copy
07.Nega/Posi
On/Off setting for Copy protection.
On/Off setting for Sorting copy
Off
On
Off
2.18
2.16
On/Off setting to reverse copy of black and white areas.
On/Off setting to combine.
2.16, 4.7
08.Combine
(for MFX-1600 only)
Off
2.17, 4.7
4.Printer Settings
01.TCP/IP*3
Enter the IP Address, Subnet mask and Gate way address.
Print the Activity journal automatically after 100 transactions.
Change the printing order of the activity journal.
4.11
3.21
3.22
C. Other Settings
1.Journal & Reports
01.Journal Auto Print
02.Journal Line Up
03.Set Report Type
Off
Off
Select TCR (Transmit Confirmation Report) or
RCR (Receive Confirmation Report).
TCR
Off
3.22
2.Cover Page
01.Set Cover Page
On/Off setting for sending the Cover page.
Enter your message for the cover page.
3.23
3.24
02.Enter Cover Page
*3: This option appears only if the optional NIC (network interface card) has been installed.
1.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Level one function
C. Other Settings
Level two function
3.Department Code
Level three function
01.Set Dept. Protect
02.Set Dept. Code
Summary of setting
Default setting
Off
Page
3.57
Protection for department code settings.
Register the Department code.
3.56
3.56
3.57
3.26
3.33
3.12
3.14
3.15
3.30
03.Set Dept. Setting
04.Erase Dp.TimeList
01.Set F-Code Box
02.Erase F-Code Box
01.Set Batch Box
On/Off setting for Department code activation.
Clear the total counts of each department code.
Create the F-Code box.
Off
4.F-Code Box
5.Batch Tx
Erase an empty F-Code box.
Create the Batch box.
02.Erase Batch Box
01.Polling Document
02.F-Code Document
Erase an empty batch box.
D. Doc. Management 1.Store Document
2.Erase Document
Store the document to be retrieved by other fax machine.
Store the document to be retrieved by other F-Code compatible
fax machine.
01.Polling Document
02.F-Code Document
03.Batch Document
01.Polling Document
02.F-Code Document
03.Batch Document
04.Security Rx Doc.
Erase stored document for polling transmission.
Erase stored document in the F-Code box.
Erase stored document in the Batch box.
3.15
3.32
3.14
3.15
3.30
3.13
3.Document Print
Print the stored document for polling transmission.
Print the stored document in the F-Code box.
Print the stored document in the Batch box.
Print the fax received document during Security reception (and
return to your machine to normal reception mode until the next
time).
3.51
05.Com. Stored Doc.
01.Machine Settings
02.Fax Settings
Print the stored document for delayed transmission.
Print a list of your machine settings.
Print a list of the fax settings.
2.9
E. Print
1.List Print
4.10
4.10
4.10
3.22
2.9
03.Copy Settings
04.Journal
Print a list of the copy settings.
Print the activity journal manually.
Print a list of the delayed commands.
Print a list of the one-touch dial keys.
Print a list of the speed-dial numbers.
Print a list of the programmable one-touch keys.
Print a list of the group numbers.
Print a list of the blocked numbers.
Print a cover page.
05.Commands List
06.One-Touch List
07.Speed-Dial List
08.P One-Touch List
09.Group List
3.3
3.6
3.49
3.8
10.Block Junk Dial List
11.Cover Page
3.55
3.24
12.Depart. Time List
Print a total communication time and printed pages of each
department code.
3.57
13.F-Code Box List
14.F-Code Doc. List
Print a list of F-Code boxes.
3.20
3.20
Print a list of the document stored in the F-Code boxes.
1.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Page
Level one function
E.Print
Level two function Level three function
Summary of setting
Default setting
1.List Print
15.Batch Box List
16.Batch Doc. List
17.Macros List
Print a list of Batch boxes.
3.13
Print a list of the document stored in the batch boxes.
Print a list of Macro keys.
3.13
3.20
4.11
4.11
4.11
4.11
2.Printer Functions 01.Demo Page*4
02.Status Page*4
Print the highlight features and functions of the printer.
Print all the status and configuration of the printer.
Print the list of all PCL fonts currently installed in the printer.
Print the NIC (network interface card) settings.
Scanning a document into the PC.
03.Font List*4
04.NIC Status*5
F. PC-FAX Commands*6 1.PC-FAX
I. User Install
01.PC-FAX Scan
02.PC-FAX Initial
03.Set RS-232C
Initializing your machine.
Setting of the RS-232C parameters.
Set-up the following settings:
Language on the LCD and Lists
Current Day and Time
Automatically Daylight saving time
Your TTI (your name)
English
Off
1.18
Subscriber ID (your fax number)
Phone dialing type
Fax reception mode
Tone
Fax Ready
*4:These option appears only if the optional printer controller has been installed.
*5: This option appears only if the optional NIC (network interface card) has been installed.
*6: This option appears only if the optional RS-232C interface has been installed. For details see the operating instructions that is included with the optional RS-232C kit.
1.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
EasyStart (Initial settings)
EasyStart software is already installed on your Muratec fax machine. It guides you
through the process of entering your machine s settings.
Entering initial settings
These settings you make here can always be changed later.
Im p or ta n t: If you press STOP during EasyStart, your fax machine returns to
standby mode (its normal condition). But it will keep the settings you
saved by pressing ENTER as described in these instructions.
Getting started
Determine the following before you go any further:
Press P r ogr a m k ey,
The LCD shows the current language setting.
I
,
ENTER.
1
Language :English
Th e typ e of d ia lin g your telephone system requires Choose either tone or
pulse (rotary) dialing.
1
← →
/ /Enter
Th e n a m e a n d fa x n u m ber you w a n t to a p p ea r on you r fa xes
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of
text at the very top of the page. This text lists a name, called the Transmit
Terminal Identifier (TTI), and a fax number. The TTI cannot be longer than 22
characters.
Press
or
until the language you want appears.
2
2
3
4
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue EasyStart.
The LCD now shows the current calendar/clock setting, with a cursor appear-
ing under the first digit.
Enter Time
Clearing stored settings
Before using EasyStart, clear your machine s built-in user data memory. This
01/01 01 00:00
ensures the memory will hold only your settings.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct date and time, using a MMDDYY
format for the date and 24-hour format for the time. For instance, to set 8:30
PM on June 11, 2000, press 0 6 1 1 0 0 2 0 3 0, which results in:
5
Im p or ta n t: After you use EasyStart, do not clear the memory again unless an
authorized technician asks you to do so.
To clear the machine s memory:
Enter Time
06/11 00 20:30
Press P r ogr a m k ey, *, 2. The LCD now asks if you want to clear the memory:
1
Note: Your fax machine automatically inserts the spaces and date-slash. All
Clear User Settings
Check Enter/Cancel
you have to do is enter the digits.
To change a digit, press
Then enter the correct digit.
to move the cursor left, or
to move it right.
Note: If you don t want to clear the memory, just press CANCEL.
If you do want to clear the memory, press ENTER.
Press ENTER to save the clock setting and continue.
2
6
1.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
The LCD now asks if you want to set the calendar/clock to automatically
recognize daylight saving time (DST).
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
7
8
14
15
The LCD now asks you to enter the type of dialing needed for the fax machine,
either tone or pulse:
Daylight Saving :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Phone Type :Tone
When the setting is On, your machine automatically recognizes DST at 2 AM on
the appropriate switchover Sundays each year.
When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
16
Here, we ve changed the setting to Pulse mode:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Here, we ve changed the setting to On:
Phone Type :Pulse
← →
/ /Enter
Daylight Saving :On
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
17
18
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
9
10
The LCD now shows the machine s current reception mode.
The LCD now asks you to enter your fax number as you want it to appear on
other fax machines displays or printouts. The fax industry term for this
number is Subscriber ID.
Fax Ready
← →
/ /Enter
For now, press
or
until the setting Fax Ready appears. (This setting can
19
20
Your Fax Number
always be changed. We ll discuss reception modes further on pages 2.10 2.11.)
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine will return to standby mode.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number. To insert a dash, as shown
here, press DIALING OP TIONS once. The number may contain up to 20
characters (numbers and dashes).
11
Your Fax Number
972-555-5525_
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one number, press
to move left, or
to move right.
Press CANCEL to erase the number. Then re-enter the fax number cor-
rectly.
Press ENTER to save the number.
12
13
The LCD now asks you to enter the name you want to appear at the top of
faxes you send. The name may be up to 22 characters in length.
Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and other non-numeric characters.
(Refer to Entering characters on page 1.12.)
Your Name ;Upper
_
1.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic
operation of the transmission,
reception and copying
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Sending faxes
How to set the document
Guidelines
You can send a fax message using the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or FBS
(Flatbed Scanner) glass. Before you begin the fax sending, please read the following
guidelines.
When setting the documents in the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
Insert your document(s) fa ce
1
u p , top ed ge fir st. If you re
Acceptable document sizes
sending a multi-page docu-
ments, fa n the pages slightly.
You can set up to 50 sheets of letter-, legal- or half letter−sized document in the
ADF at one time. However, it s possible to fax a piece of paper as small as a notepad
sheet or one up to three feet long.
Adjust the document width
2
guide to fit your documents.
The acceptable dimensions (width × length) are:
Au tom a tic d ocu m en t feed er (ADF
SINGLE-SHEET
)
MULTIPLE-SHEET
Note: The ADF can hold up to 50 pages of normal weight paper.
Maximum: 8.5″ × 35.4″
Maximum: 8.5″ × 14.0″
Minimum: 4.7″ × 3.9″
Minimum: 5.8″ × 4.1″
When setting the documents on the FBS (Flatbed Scanner) glass
F la tbed sca n n er (F BS)
Maximum: 8.5″ × 14.0″
Make sure the document is not
in the ADF.
1
Things n ot to put in your fax
Lift the platen cover.
To avoid paper jams and damage to your machine, d on t in ser t:
Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages
Documents with staples, glue, tape, paper clips or still-wet correction fluid
Sticky notes (or documents with sticky notes attached)
Cardboard, newspaper or fabric
2
Set your document fa ce d ow n
3
on the FBS glass. The document
should be aligned to the fr on t
r igh t cor n er .
Gently close the platen cover.
Pages with duplicating carbon on either side
Credit cards or any small, thick items
4
Im p or ta n t: Gently close the platen cover so that you don t catch your
hands, possibly injuring them.
OHP transparency film
2.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Resolution, grayscale
Mixing resolution and contrast in a multiple page
When you send the document with more than one page, you can select different res-
olutions and contrasts for each page.
Reviewing resolution and grayscale:
Nor m a l resolution ( NORM on the control panel) is suitable for most typed
documents and simple drawings.
Insert your documents, select resolution and contrast for first page, dial and press
START. Then follow one of the following two procedures.
Fin e resolution ( FINE on the control panel) is ideal for maps, moderately compli-
cated drawings, floorplans or handwritten documents.
When the document is placed in the ADF:
Su per fin e resolution ( S-FINE on the control panel, S Fin e on the LCD)
reproduces the detail of extremely complicated drawings or line art.
Select resolution and contrast before the next page is scanned.
When the document is placed on the FBS glass:
Gr a ysca le mode ( HALFTONE on the control panel; Gray on the LCD) captures
shades in photos and drawings.
Remove the previous page and place the next page.
1
2
Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older, non-
Muratec models) receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a fax in
grayscale mode to virtually any fax machine currently in use.
Select resolution and contrast. Then press NEXT DOC.
HALFTONE
S-FINE
Dialing pause
Some long-distance systems require dialing pauses, and pauses can also be useful
when you re dialing through special telephone exchanges.
To change the resolution setting, press RESOLUTION repeatedly.
A glowing LED indicates the fax is using the setting named by
FINE
NORMAL
that LED. For example, in the drawing (right), the machine is set
for FINE resolution.
To insert a pause, just press REDIAL/PAUSE. (The pause character (-/) will appear on
the LCD.) Each pause entered lasts for a factory-set two seconds.
DOCUMENT
RESOLUTION
For example, pressing 9, REDIAL/PAUSE, 19725552009 dials 9 [2-second pause] 1 9 7
2 5 5 5 2 0 0 9.
Help fu l Tip : You can change the dialing pause length within 2 to 10 seconds.
(see Changing the pause length, page 4.5.)
Contrast
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or dark-
ness, as the case may be, of document pages you are sending or copying.
Potential problems with call-waiting and voice mail
Telephone call-waiting signals can stop fax transmission and reception. And any
ser vice su ch as voice mail which may intercept your calls can keep your fax
machine from receiving fax calls.
DARK
To change the contrast setting, press CONTRAST repeatedly.
A glowing LED indicates the fax is using the setting named by
that LED.
NORMAL
If you use only one line for both phone and fax, consult your telephone company to
see how you can temporarily disable call-waiting or voice mail while using the fax
machine.
LIGHT
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just
r em em ber Light lightens and Dark darkens
keep it straight.
CONTRAST
t o
2.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Memory transmission
Quick memory transmission
Using Quick Memory transmission can save you time over standard memory trans-
missions.
Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:
Sa ve Tim e. By using your fax machine s memory, you won t have to wait for your
machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your
machine s memory, and you can walk away with your original in hand.
For a normal memory transmission, your fax: (1) scans your entire document into
memory, (2) dials the other fax machine, then (3) transmits the document.
Sa ve Mon ey. If you re transmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your
machine will send the document directly into the other machine s memory and hang
up. (The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the
call has ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.
But with Quick Memory transmission, your machine doesn t wait to scan all pages
into memory before dialing. After it scans the first page of your document, your
machine dials the call. While dialing, connecting and transmitting, your fax
machine continues to scan in the remaining pages of the document.
Sa ve Even Mor e Mon ey. Set up a delayed transmission (see page 3.11) to send
your document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges
will be cheaper.
The quick memory transmission is On for default setting. However, you can turn off
it for the default. (See page 4.2.)
Im p or ta n t: To use Quick Memory transmission, the memory transmission feature
Note: Some documents use up memory more quickly than others. They include
documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the
machine s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document feeder.
must be turned on.
The memory transmission is On for default setting. However, you can turn off it for
the default. (See page 4.2.)
Real time transmission (Non-memory transmission)
In the following cases, the machine does not use its memory for sending a fax:
Help fu l Tip : You can override the default setting of memory transmission for only
one transmission by pressing MEMORY TRANSMISSION before you send
your document. After completing the communication, your machine
will return to the default setting.
When you turned off the memory transmission
When you are sending a fax using MONITOR/CALL key or optional handset (see
page 2.6.)
When the machine s memory is full
It is called Real time transmission mode. In this mode, the next page is not scanned
in while the current page is being transmitted.
Memory overflow message
In normal memory transmission, if you ve stored too much information in your
machine s memory, a Memory Overflow message may appear on the LCD:
Note: In this mode, only one destination can be dialed.
Note: Real time transmission available only when using the ADF. When transmit-
ting use the FBS glass, the machine always uses Memory transmission mode
even if you set the memory transmission to off.
Memory Overflow
Start Or Cancel
This appears because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)
the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your fax machine
to remember.
If this message appears, press START to tell your fax to keep as many pages in mem-
ory as possible, or press CANCEL to erase from memory all pages stored during the
current operation (but not previous operations).
Note: If you don t operate your machine within 60 seconds, the machine automati-
cally erase the document stored in the memory during the current
operation.
Dividing a large document into smaller batches will help you avoid this error.
2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Sending a fax using the ADF
Now, everything is up to the machines yours and the one you re dialing.
6
If the fax has been set for Quick Memory transmit, your machine scans the
first page of your document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it
makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory
while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document
into memory. (In default setting, the Quick Memory transmission is On. If
you want to turn off this feature, see page 4.2.)
If the fax has been set for the normal memory transmit, your fax scans the
entire document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it makes con-
tact, your machine transmits the entire stored document from memory.
If the fax is set for Real time transmit (non-memory transmission), your
machine simply dials the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine
feeds the document through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.
Press COP Y/F AX to change to Fax mode.
1
2
Note: The more stuff (called black coverage) your machine sees on a
page, the more slowly the page feeds through as the fax scans it. And
even if the page is relatively clean, sending it in grayscale mode or at
certain resolutions makes your machine see more stuff.
The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.
Insert the document fa ce u p , top ed ge fir st. And adjust the document
guides by sliding either of them to the left or right to fit the page(s)
you ll be faxing. Your fax machine s ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) will
hold up to 50 pages with letter-sized paper.
When a document is in the feeder, the LCD shows the scanning width (see
in the Glossary beginning on page 5.17) and the amount of memory available:
A4
Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-
ment, press the STOP key.
Document Ready
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review
Commands function. See Reviewing or canceling commands,
page 2.8.
A4
Mem100%
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
3
4
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
7
Enter the fax number.
919725552009
** Complete **
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone
call. (Example: Enter 9 to dial out from an office telephone system, or 1 for
long-distance.)
Im p or ta n t: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the
remote fax. The line may even be blank.
Press Start
919725552009_
Note: If the call fails, see Redialing, page 2.7.
Press START.
5
By pressing START, you ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:
== Command:01 ==
You ll need to know this command number if you later wish to cancel the
transmission or to print a stored document (see pages 2.8 2.9).
2.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Sending a fax using the FBS glass
Enter the fax number.
7
8
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone
call. (Example: Enter 9 to dial out from an office telephone system, or 1 for
long-distance.)
Press Start
919725552009_
Press START.
By pressing START, you ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:
== Command:01 ==
You ll need this command number to cancel the transmission or to print a
stored document (see pages 2.8 2.9).
Press COP Y/F AX to change to Fax mode.
1
2
3
4
Then your machine will scan the document into the memory.
While your machine scans the document, the LCD will show:
If there s a document in the ADF, remove it.
919725552009
Ltr NextDoc Mem100%
Open the platen cover.
Place the document fa ce d ow n on the FBS glass and align it with the docu-
ment scale on the right, then gently close the platen cover.
The document should be aligned to the r igh t fr on t cor n er .
When the scanning is done, the LCD will show:
9
→
Start Scan NextDoc
Im p or ta n t: Gently close the platen cover so that you don t catch your
hands, possibly injuring them.
→
Tx Start
Start
When a thick document, such as a book, is on the FBS glass,
d o n ot pr ess str on gly from the top of the platen cover. This
may break the FBS glass and cause an injury.
If you want to send more pages, proceed to step 10.
Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 11.
Place the next page, then press NEXT DOC to start scanning.
10
11
Press DOCUMENT SIZE to select the document size, letter (displayed as Ltr),
legal (Legl) or half-letter (HLtr). (Half-letter is 8.5″ wide 5.5″ tall.)
Note: If necessary, select the document size (see step 5).
5
To send any more pages, repeat steps 9-10.
Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 11.
Now, everything is up to the machines yours and the one you re dialing.
When it makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from
memory.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-
ment, press the STOP key.
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review
Commands function. See Reviewing or canceling commands,
page 2.8.
6
2.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
Sending a fax using MONITOR/CALL key or a handset
You also can fax a document using either the monitor speaker or the optional
handset to dial the call.
12
919725552009
** Complete **
Note: In this function, you cannot send a fax using the FBS glass.
Im p or ta n t: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the
remote fax. The line may even be blank.
Insert the document to the ADF.
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Note: If the call fails, see Redialing, page 2.7.
Obtain a dial tone, either by:
Pressing MONITOR/CALL
o r
Lifting the optional handset.
In either case, the LCD shows:
** Tel Mode **
_
Enter the fax number by using the numeric keypad.
Also, enter access codes with the number, just as for a regular phone call.
4
** Tel Mode **
919725552009_
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.
5
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that
person that you re trying to send a fax. When you hear fax tones,
press START.
If you re using an optional handset, hang up after pressing START.
6
7
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
919725552009
** Complete **
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press
MONITOR/CALL to hang up. Or if you ve pressed START to begin the fax
transmission, press STOP to end it.
Also see Redialing manually, next page, if the call fails.
2.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Redialing
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
3
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Automatically fax redialing
If your fax call fails, your machine automatically redials it. In this Auto Redial
mode, your fax automatically redials the number up to two times at one minute inter-
vals.
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers. Press
dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until the
4
5
Note: You can change the redial time and interval settings. (See Changing redial
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.
settings, page 4.5.)
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that
person you re sending a fax. When you hear fax tones, press START.
While in the Auto Redial mode, the machine can continue to receive faxes and can
make as many as 99 fax transmissions.
To redial a voice call manually using the optional handset:
Note: If you used either the MONITOR/CALL key or a handset to dial the call, you
Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.
1
2
must redial manually (see below).
Note: If the last redial attempt fails, your machine may print (and/or display)
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
error messages.
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Redialing manually
You can always redial calls manually. And you must redial manually if you used
either the MONITOR/CALL key or an optional handset to dial the failed call.
Your machine can memory the latest 10 dial numbers. Press
dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until the
3
To redial a fax call manually without using the MONITOR/CALL key or an
optional handset:
Press START.
4
When the other person answers, use the optional handset to speak to that
person.
Set the document and set the resolution and contrast.
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers. Press
dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until the
3
4
Press START.
To redial a fax call manually with the MONITOR/CALL key or an optional
handset:
Make sure the document is in the ADF and that the resolution and contrast
are set.
1
Press MONITOR/CALL or lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.
2
2.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Reviewing or canceling commands
Your fax machine can store many jobs in its memory. And it keeps track of each
one by assigning it a command number, like C01.
To go ahead with canceling the command, press CANCEL again. Go back to
step 2 to view other delayed commands.
4
To keep this command but to continue reviewing stored commands, press
or . Go back to step 2.
Delayed commands, redial attempts and current fax transmissions are all stored in
your fax machine s memory and given a command number. Your machine can store
up to 99 delayed commands. It identifies each by a two-digit command number rang-
ing from 01 to 99.
To keep this command and stop reviewing commands, press STOP to return
your machine to standby mode.
Note: See also Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast, below.
The Review Commands function gives you the power to check on each job (or
command) in your machine s memory. It also lets you cancel a command if you
decide not to send the document.
Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast
You also can review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:
To see your machine s stored commands or to cancel them:
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.
1
1
2
The LCD shows the first command, indicated by its command number and
the phone number it will dial.
Press
or
to scroll through currently stored broadcast command.
If a command is in progress, that will be the first command the LCD shows:
Note: Stop this operation at any time by pressing STOP.
C01:5552009
C01:Broadcast
↑ ↓ →
// /Cancel
↑ ↓ →
// /Cancel
If th er e a r e n o stor ed com m a n d s in you r m a ch in e It beeps briefly
and displays No Command on the LCD. It then returns to standby mode.
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL, CANCEL.
3
4
If you want to review individual numbers within this broadcast, go on to
step 4 without pressing CANCEL.
Here, you see command 01, followed by the number it s set to dial. If the com-
mand is to send a broadcast, Broadcast appears instead of the phone
number. (See Broadcasting, page 3.10.)
To review individual numbers within this broadcast, press
(or BROADCAST)
to see the first number. The LCD shows:
If the command is to send a batch transmission, the LCD shows its batch box
number (such as B01 ) rather than the command number. (See Batch trans-
mission, pages 3.12 3.14.)
9-5550388
↑ ↓ ←
// /Cancel
If the command is for a Call group dialing, the group number (such as G01 )
appears instead of the phone number. (See Call group dialing, page 3.8.)
Press
or
until you find the number you want to cancel.
5
6
Note: If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears
Press CANCEL, CANCEL. The next number will appear.
on the display.
If you want to cancel this number, also, repeat this step.
If you want to cancel a different number, go back to step 5.
If you want to go back to reviewing or canceling other command, press
Press
or
to scroll through currently stored commands.
2
3
.
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL. The LCD shows:
If you don t want to cancel any more numbers, press STOP . The machine
returns to standby mode.
C01:9-5552311
↑ ↓ →
Check / / /Cancel
2.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Printing a delayed command list
Your machine can print a command list which tells you:
The command s identification number
The phone number, or remote location
The start time (this appears in a DD,HH:MM format)
A n ot e telling if the command is a polling or F-Code operation (see pages
3.15 3.16 for more on polling and 3.26 3.35 for more on F-Code communication).
To print a delayed command list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 5 ENTER.
Printing a stored document
Your fax machine can print out each document stored for delayed transmission.
To print a stored document, you ll need to know the document s command number,
which you can get by either reviewing the commands or printing a delayed com-
mand list (see above).
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 3, 0, 5 ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Com. Stored Doc.
Command No.
:_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the command s identification number, 1 99.
For example, we could enter the following for the very first command, 1:
2
3
Com. Stored Doc.
Command No.
:1_
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a copy of the stored document.
2.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Receiving faxes
Answering calls manually
In any reception mode, you can always answer calls manually if you have an
Reception modes
Your fax machine has five different reception modes
Tel Ready, Fax Ready,
optional handset installed. Just pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.
Fax/ Tel Ready, Tel/ Fax Ready and Ans/ Fax Ready. We ll explain each of these in
this section.
Tel Ready mode
If you hear someone speaking to you, use your
optional handset to speak back.
Use it if:
You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls
and
On that line, you re using at least one other phone which is not
connected to your fax machine
or
You have an optional handset installed on your fax machine
If you hear fax tones ( beep beep beep ),
press START and hang up the optional handset.
The fax machine will begin receiving a fax.
In th is m od e: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically. You must
answer each call as described in Answering calls manually (this
page, left column).
Note: Don t try to answer a call by pressing
MONITOR/CALL. The monitor function is
for dialing only.
Fax Ready mode
Use it if:
Your fax machine uses its own phone line and doesn t share it with a
phone or an answering machine.
Answering fax calls using another phone, not the fax machine
In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call and attempts to receive a fax.
If you have one phone line ringing to several phones in your office and you have an
optional handset attached to your fax, there s no need to run to the fax machine to
answer every call. If you happen to answer a fax call while you re at another
extension, put the handset down, but don t hang up. Walk to the fax machine and
pick up the optional handset. Then press START.
Fax/Tel Ready mode
The Fax/Tel Ready mode is a combination of the Fax Ready and Tel Ready modes.
Use it if:
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine
and
After you press START, hang up both the fax machine s optional handset and the
second telephone s handset. Because remote fax machines will wait several seconds
to hear reception tones from your unit, you have about 30 seconds to walk to your
fax, pick up the handset, and press START.
You re using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone
In th is m od e: Your fax machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a
regular voice call comes in. (Your fax machine also beeps once at the
end of each reception.)
If a voice call comes in, your fax machine detects it and sounds a
special ring. If you hear it, answer using your optional handset.
While using an optional handset for your call, if you press COP Y RESET, the LCD
shows the current fax reception mode. Press COP Y RESET again to return to the TEL
mode.
Note: This Fax/Tel Ready mode won t turn off ringers on other telephones in your
house or office. Other phones won t distinguish between fax and voice calls.
2.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Tel/Fax Ready mode
The Tel/Fax Ready mode is a combination of the Tel Ready and Fax Ready modes.
How to select the fax reception mode:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, I, and then press ENTER seven times. The LCD shows your
current fax reception mode:
1
Use it if:
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine
and
Fax Ready
You re using the machine as both a telephone and a fax machine
← →
/ /Enter
In th is m od e: Your fax machine rings the number of times you ve identified in the
user settings (the default setting is two times). If you don t use the
optional handset to answer the call, your fax machine answers the
call. If a caller sends a fax, your machine begins receiving it. If a
voice call comes in, your machine detects it and sounds a special
ring, telling you to answer using the optional handset.
Press
or
until your desired reception mode is appeared.
2
3
Fax/Tel Ready
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Ans/Fax Ready mode
Use it if:
You re using an answering machine that s connected directly to your
fax machine.
If the paper runs out while fax reception
When your machine runs out of paper, it beeps, the red light
of the printer status lights glows and the LCD shows which
source has run out of paper the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette
(optional) or the bypass tray.
In th is m od e: An answering machine connected to your fax machine answers each
call. If a voice call comes in, the answering machine begins to record
the incoming message. If your fax machine hears a fax tone, it
begins receiving the fax message.
Using an answering machine with your fax machine
In this example, the machine runs out of paper in 1st cassette:
To connect your answering machine to your fax machine:
1st Cassette
Please Supply Paper
Set the fax machine for Ans/Fax Ready, as described on right column.
1
2
Help fu l Tip : If the letter, legal or half-letter sized paper has been set in the bypass
tray, your machine uses it when running out of paper in the paper
cassette(s) during fax reception. Your machine s bypass tray can hold
up to 50 sheets of the paper.
Set your answering machine to answer calls after no more than two rings.
(See the answering machine s instructions if necessary.)
Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine.
Here s a suggested message:
3
Your fax machine cannot print fax messages without paper. But it can still receive
documents into its memory, as described in the section below.
Hello! You ve reached [your name or telephone number]. To leave a voice
message, please wait for the beep. To send a fa x, press START on your fax
machine. Thanks for calling!
Out-of-paper reception
If your machine runs out of paper, it stores up to 250 fax receptions in its memory.
This is called out-of-paper reception. Once you refill the paper supply, the fax
machine prints the stored messages automatically.
Im p or ta n t: Your answering machine s outgoing message must be no longer
than 10 seconds.
Detection of silent fax machines
Note: The number of pages (not receptions) your fax machine can store for
Some older fax machines don t send fax tones when transmitting, which can cause
problems when using an answering machine with your fax.
out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends on:
Your machine s memory capacity
But your fax machine can accommodate these silent machines without disrupting
your answering machine operation.
Types of documents being sent to your machine
Resolution of documents being sent to your machine
2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Making copies
Your machine s copier features
Place your original document in ADF fa ce u p , or on the FBS glass fa ce
d ow n just as you would to send a fax.
2
Your machine has the following copier features:
Single copy (see the right column on this page)
Stacking multiple copies (see page 2.12)
Sorting multiple copies (see page 2.12)
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
3
4
As needed, set the following:
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Enter the number of copies
Enlarged or reduced copies (see page 2.13)
Negative/positive copy (Reverse black and white areas) (see page 2.16)
Combine copy (see page 2.17)
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Note: For details about each item, see Making copy settings, page 2.15.
Ultra copy mode (see page 2.17)
Press START.
5
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COP Y RESET.
Basic copy procedure
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
Press COP Y/F AX to change to
Copy mode.
1
COPY/FAX key
Single copy
Press COP Y/F AX to change to Copy mode.
1
2
Place your original document in ADF fa ce u p , or on the FBS glass fa ce
d ow n just as you would to send a fax.
If you are using FBS glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
3
4
When the machine is in the Copy mode, the LCD shows:
Number of copies
As needed, set the following:
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Note: If you want to enlarge copy, use the FBS glass.
Recording paper size
Document size
Press START.
5
Note: For details about each item, see Making copy settings, page 2.15
2.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Stacking multiple copies
Enlarged or reduced copies
Your fax machine is capable of enlargement and reduction when copying.
Press COP Y/F AX to change to Copy mode.
1
2
Note: The copy enlargement and reduction rate setting is available only for copy-
Turn the sort setting off. (See page 2.16.)
ing, not for faxing.
Note: The default setting of sorting is on.
Im p or ta n t: Copy enlargement is available only for copying using the FBS; it is not
available for copying using the ADF.
Place your original document in ADF fa ce u p , or on the FBS glass fa ce
d ow n just as you would to send a fax.
3
Press COP Y/F AX to change to Copy mode.
1
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
Place your original document in ADF fa ce u p , or on the FBS glass fa ce
d ow n just as you would send a fax.
4
5
6
2
Using the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).
Note: If you want to enlarged copy, use FBS glass.
As needed, set the following:
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
3
4
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Choose an enlargement or reduction ratio using
or
of the cursor key.
You can reduce to 78%, 64 % or 50 % of the original size
Note: For details about each items, see Making copy settings, page 2.15.
O R
Press START.
You can enlarge to 129% or 200 %
O R
Press ZOOM to turn the ZOOM ligh t on, and adjust the ratio at 1% steps using
7
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
or
of the cursor key. You can enter the ratio between 50% and 200%.
O R
Sorting multiple copies (using ADF)
Note: You cannot use the FBS glass for sorting multiple copies.
Directly enter any percentage between 50 % and 200 % by following proce-
dure.
1. Press #.
2. Using the numeric key to enter your desired ratio (50 to 200).
3. Press # again.
Press COP Y/F AX to change to Copy mode.
1
2
3
Make sure the sort setting is turned on. (See page 2.16.)
129%: Half-letter (5.5″ 8.5″) → Letter (8.5″ 1 1″)
78%: Legal (8.5″ 1 4″) → Letter (8.5″ 1 1″)
Place your original document in ADF fa ce u p , just as you would to send a
fax.
Help fu l Tip : You can set the copy reduction or enlargement ratio to Auto .
(See Setting copy auto, page 4.7.) If the Auto is set and you
set the document size by pressing DOCUMENT SIZE, the machine
automatically reduce or enlarge the original size (you entered)
to fit on the paper size you selected.
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
4
5
6
Using the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).
As needed, set the following:
As needed, set the following:
5
6
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Set copy reduction ratio
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Enter the number of copies
Note: For details about each items, see Making the copy settings, page 2.15.
Press START.
Press START.
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COP Y RESET.
7
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
2.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Using the bypass tray
If the paper runs out while copying
When you need to use a size of paper not currently loaded in your machine s paper
cassette(s), or when you want to use a special type of paper (such as transparency
film), use the bypass tray.
When your machine runs out of paper, it beeps, the red light
of the printer status lights glows and the LCD shows which
source has run out of paper the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette
(optional) or the bypass tray.
Im p or ta n t: If loading transparency (OHP) film into the bypass tray, be sure that
the sheet is designed for laser printers and not for copiers. Also, be
sure that the film does not have a paper backing and/or a leading
strip. If it does, remove the paper backing and/or strip before insert-
ing. Only film should go in, not film with any backing or strip.
In this example, the machine runs out of the paper in the 1st
cassette:
1st Cassette
Please Supply Paper
Either insert the document in the ADF or place it on the F BS glass.
1
If you want to cancel the current copying job, press STOP . Otherwise, supply the
paper to displayed paper source to resume the copying.
Set the paper in the bypass tray.
See the table of Acceptable paper size and cassette capacity on page 1.8 and
Loading paper in bypass tray on page 1.10 for more information.
2
Note: Place the original document in the same orientation as the paper in
the paper source (which you ll select in step 5, below).
Press PAP ER SIZE to select the bypass tray until the
light of the bypass tray of the printer status lights on
the control panel glows.
3
If necessary, select desired resolution, contrast,
reduction/enlargement ratio.
4
Press START to begin the copying process.
5
Memory overflow message
If you ve stored too much information in your machine s memory, a Memory
Overflow message may appear on the LCD:
Memory Overflow
Start Or Cancel
This appears because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)
the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your fax machine
to remember.
If this message appears, press START to tell your machine to copy as many pages in
memory, or press CANCEL to delete from memory all pages stored during the current
operation (but not previous operations).
Note: If you don t operate your machine within 60 seconds, the machine will auto-
matically print the document stored in the memory during the current
operation.
2.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Recording paper size
Making copy settings
As default, your machine selects the paper source automatically, however if you
wish to select the paper source manually, press PAP ER SIZE repeatedly until your
desired paper size is displayed. The LCD toggles the paper size in the 1st cassette,
2nd cassette (if installed), the bypass tray and Au to select mode.
When the machine is in the Copy mode, the LCD shows:
Number of copies
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Recording paper size
Document size
Number of pages
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for the document.
Note: If the bypass tray has no paper, the LCD shows Non e for the paper size of
Copy reduction or enlargement rate
the bypass tray.
Your fax machine can make enlarged and reduced copies. For more information, see
Enlarged or reduced copies, page 2.13.
Note: When you choose the auto paper select mode, the LCD
shows Au to and the all LED of the paper source will
be lit.
Document size
However, if the bypass tray has no paper and the
optional 2nd paper cassette has not been installed,
the machine will show the [(paper size)] instead
of Au to although you select auto paper select mode.
And it lights the LED of the paper source that can be
used only.
To select the document size manually, press DOCUMENT SIZE repeatedly until your
desired document size appears. You can choose the Letter, Legal or Half letter:
Select Document type
PHOTO
PHOTO
/TEXT
P HOTO Select this mode when copying photographs or
drawings.
TEXT
Note: When the document size is set to Auto (see Setting copy auto, page 4.7)
P HOTO/TEXT Select this mode when copying documents
containing photographs or drawings with letters.
you may see the LCD as below:
DOCUMENT
RESOLUTION
Copy Ready
1
TEXT Select this mode when copying letters.
[ Ltr ] Ltr 100%
[
] means the machine automatically select the document size.
To select the document type, press DOCUMENT repeatedly.
A glowing LED indicates the machine is using the setting named by that LED.
Note: According to the magnification ratio or recording paper size, the document
size will be not displayed:
Copy Ready
-----
1
50%
Ltr
2.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Adjust image contrast
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive light or darkness, of
the document pages you are copying.
Special copy function
Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas)
If using this feature, the black and white areas of the original are reversed.
Note: You cannot combine this feature with Reduced or Enlarged copies.
DARK
To change the contrast setting, press CONTRAST repeatedly.
A glowing LED indicates the machine is using the setting named
by that LED.
NORMAL
Help fu l tip : If you programmed a Soft key to turn on or off this feature, simply
LIGHT
pressing that key will turn on or off this feature.
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just
r em em ber Light lightens and Dark darkens
keep it straight.
CONTRAST
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.
1
2
3
4
t o
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the FBS glass face down.
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
Sort copy setting
Default setting: On
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows the current setting:
Help fu l tip : If you frequently turn this feature off and on, you can set a Soft key
Nega/Posi :Off
(see page 3.17) to turn on or off by simply pressing that key.
← →
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 6.
Note: This feature is Off for default setting. However, you can turn on it for
1
2
the default. (See page 4.7.)
Press ENTER.
The LCD shows the current setting:
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
5
6
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Sort Copy :On
Nega/Posi
:On
/ /Enter
← →
/ /Enter
← →
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
3
4
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine returns to the standby mode
with following display:
In this example, we ve chosen Off.
Sort Copy
:Off
/ /Enter
Copy <Nega/Posi> 1
Ltr [ Ltr ] 100%
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
As needed, set the following:
7
8
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Enter the number of copies
Press START.
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COP Y RESET.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
2.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Combine
Ultra copy mode
Note: This feature is available only for MFX-1600 model.
Note: This feature is available only for MFX-1600 model.
Note: The enlargement/Reduction copy is not available with this mode.
This feature allows you to copying from four one-sided originals to one sheet of
paper.
Note: This mode needs more memory than normal mode. So when you try to make
many copies at a time, the memory overflow may occur.
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.
1
2
3
4
This feature allows you to copying with more high quality resolution.
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the FBS glass face down.
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.
1
2
3
4
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the FBS glass face down.
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS twice, ENTER. The LCD shows the current setting:
Enter the document size by pressing DOCUMENT SIZE.
Combine
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS three times, ENTER. The LCD shows the current
setting:
Note: This feature is Off for default setting. However, you can turn on it for
Ultra Copy
:Off
the default. (See page 4.7.)
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
5
6
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
5
6
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Combine
:On
/ /Enter
← →
Ultra Copy
:On
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine return to the standby mode
with following display:
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine return to the standby mode
with following display:
Copy <Combine> 1
Ltr [ Ltr ] 100%
Copy <Ultra Copy> 1
Ltr [ Ltr ] 100%
As needed, set the following:
7
8
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Enter the number of copies
As needed, set the following:
7
8
Select document type and adjust image contrast
Enter the number of copies
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Press START.
Press START.
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COP Y RESET.
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COP Y RESET.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP
.
2.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Copy protection
With such a versatile copier built right into your fax machine, you might want to
make sure it doesn t become too tempting to unauthorized copying that could
deplete your machine s supplies more rapidly. So, to limit the use of your fax
machine to only sending and receiving faxes in other words, to activate copy pro-
tection:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 5, ENTER.
1
Copy Protect :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
3
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Copy Protect :On
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Copy Protect
** Complete **
Whenever someone tries to change the machine to Copy mode, the machine will
sound a brief alarm tone and display:
Fax Ready
Copy Off
To turn copy protection to use the machine s copying function, repeat steps 1-3, in
step 2, you press
so that the display shows:
Copy Protect :Off
← →
/ /Enter
2.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Using your fax machine as a phone
Your fax machine can also be used as a phone, if you have an optional handset
installed. The following is a brief look at the machine s telephone features.
Redial
Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
Dialing a telephone number
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Pick up the optional handset. You will hear a dial tone.
1
2
Dial the number by the using numeric keypad.
Your machine can remember the latest 10 dial numbers. Press
the dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until
3
4
or
Press the one-touch key. (See One-touch phone dialing, on page 3.4.)
Press START.
When the other person answers, use the optional handset to speak to that
person.
or
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX once, then press the three digit speed-dial num-
ber. (See Phoning via speed-dial, on page 3.7.)
or
Call request
Press TEL INDEX/TEL INDEX twice, then search the name you want to call using
the cursor key. (See Easy dial directory dialing, page 3.9.)
You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the
same call.
When the other person answers, begin speaking.
For more information on how to use this function, see page 3.25.
3
On-hook dialing
Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the
optional handset. For hands-free dialing:
Changing the dialing type
If, with your machine set for pu lse dialing, you must enter tones ( DTMF ) during a
call, press DIALING OP TIONS once (the ! symbol will be shown on the LCD). Your
machine now will t on e dial all subsequent numbers.
Press MONITOR/CALL. You ll hear a dial tone (unless you have set your speaker
volume to Off; see page 1.8), and the LCD shows:
1
Note: Using this key enables tone transmission from the numeric keypad after the
call is connected. When you hang up the call, your machine will return to
pu lse dialing for the next call.
** Tel Mode **
_
Dial the number you want. Use either the numeric keypad, a one-touch key, a
speed-dial number or telephone index to dial.
2
Dialing in the event of a power failure
Your fax machine can only receive telephone calls even in the event of a power fail-
ure, if an optional handset is attached. But it cannot send or receive a fax document.
Im p or ta n t: Your machine s monitor speaker is not a speaker phone. If a person
answers the call, pick up the handset to speak.
Note: If the call fails, press MONITOR/CALL to hang up.
2.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Attaching an optional handset
You may purchase an optional handset for your fax machine. Here is how to attach
the handset.
Attaching a second phone
Want to attach a second phone (even a cordless model!) to your fax machine, so they
can share the same phone jack? No problem.
Before we go further, let s explain the idea. You re plugging the second phone s
phone line into your machine s P HONE2 jack, not the wall phone jack. In such a
setup, only your machine connects to the wall. The second phone receives phone sig-
nals through your machine.
Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, attach the handset cradle to the left
side of your machine, using the screws included with the cradle.
1
Now, let s p r oceed
Plug one end of the handset cord (it s curled) into the P HONE1 jack on the rear
side of your machine.
2
If your second phone is already plugged into a wall phone jack, disconnect it
from that jack. Hold onto the phone plug; you ll need it in step 2.
1
Note: Of course, if your second phone is a model which requires AC power,
as is true for the base of a cordless phone, don t unplug it from its AC
power jack!
LINE PHONE2 PHONE1
Using the plug mentioned in step 1, plug the phone cable from your second
phone into the P HONE2 jack on the left side of your fax machine.
2
Plug the other end of the handset cord into the jack on the handset. If con-
nected to a phone line, your fax machine is now off-hook.
3
Note: The handset has a small fla sh button which you can press while
holding the handset, putting the fax machine back on-hook until you
can hang up the handset properly in step 4.
Place the telephone handset onto the handset cradle. The cradle will press the
handset s fla sh button, hanging up the handset.
4
2.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
This page intentionally blank.
2.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Features
This chapter describes
convenient features of your
machine.
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Autodialer
Your fax machine s autodialer stores your most frequently called phone and fax
numbers for instant recall so you don t have to remember them. It s something like
an electronic phone book.
Special Dialing Characters
Your fax machine allows you to enter special dialing characters when programming
the autodialer. These characters include hyphens, which make phone numbers eas-
ier to read, and special characters needed for international calls.
The chart below briefly describes each of these characters. It also tells you what
keys to press on your fax machine to store those characters in your autodialer:
Autodialer basics
How do you autodial?
There are two kinds of autodialer numbers. The difference between the two is how
you dial them:
Ch a r. Wh a t it d oes
Keystr ok e(s)
Makes long numbers easier to read.
Typ e
How to d ia l
Am ou n t stor ed
DIALING OP TIONS (once)
DIALING OP TIONS (twice)
DIALING OP TIONS (3 times)
–
/
!
Doesn t change fax machine operation.
One-touch
Press one of the keys, marked 01 55
on the left side of the control panel
55
(Has no effect in the United States.)
Speed-dial
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX followed by a
three-digit identifier, from 001 to 145
145
Tells your fax machine to pause until it
h ea r s a dial tone.
Tota l a m ou n t of n u m ber s stor ed
200
Enters a pause. Each pause lasts two
seconds (or whatever length you set; see
page 4.5). Each pause uses two of the
characters you can store in one phone
number.
Location IDs and the EasyDial directory
When you store numbers in your autodialer, you can give these numbers descriptive
names, such as Chicago office or Billing department . Your machine calls this
name a Location ID.
REDIAL/PAUSE [after you enter
at least one other character]
–/
–!
Your machine s autodialer sorts these location IDs alphabetically. Using your
EasyDial directory, you can look up these numbers by their descriptive names, just
as if you were using a phone book.
If your fax machine is on a pulse (not
tone-dialing) line, switches from pulse-
dialing to tone ( DTMF )-dialing. Use after
the actual phone number but before any
characters (such as a long-distance
carrier s access code) which must be in
DTMF tone. Do not use on a tone line.
DIALING OP TIONS (4 times)
We ll explain how to store the numbers and location IDs in the next few pages.
The EasyDial directory is discussed in detail on page 3.9.
3.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Call groups
When the number is as you want it, press ENTER to store it.
5
6
As you set up your autodialer, you may also want to set up call groups. These are sets
of phone numbers that make it easy to send the same fax to many different loca-
tions. For example, one call group may include all of your clients in one city, another
group may include all of your employees and another may include all your vendors.
The LCD now shows either:
02:Alt. No.
_
02:Alt. No.
9-1-555-987-6553_
or
Your fax machine can store as many as 200 numbers in up to 32 call groups.
See also Call group dialing, page 3.8.
You now have the option to enter (or change) an alternative number. Your fax
machine will dial this alternative number during a transmission after all
redial attempts to the regular number fail. If the alternative number also
fails, the fax alarm beeps to alert you to a problem.
Using one-touch keys
Your fax machine stores up to 55 one-touch numbers using the keys marked 01 55.
Note: You can enter one alternative number for one speed-dial or one-touch
number you entered. Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative
numbers in all, that is, only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can
have the alternative number. After you have entered the alternative
numbers for 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers, your machine will
no longer show this display.
Entering or changing a one-touch number
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 1, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the empty one-touch
number.
1
If you want to enter (or change) an alternative number, enter it now.
The number can be up to 40 characters long.
If you do not want to enter or change an alternative number, go on to step 7.
Select One-Touch
01:No Number Stored
Note: If a one-touch number other than 01 appears on the LCD, it means
Press ENTER.
7
8
that you have already entered a number for 01.
The LCD now shows:
Press the one-touch key in which you want to store a number or change a
previously stored number. Here, we ve selected 02 and the LCD shows either:
2
02:Name ;Upper
_
02:Name ;Lower
or
S. W.Region Office_
Select One-Touch
02:No Number Stored
Select One-Touch
02:9-1-555-987-6543
or
The machine is now prompting you for a name a Location ID
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 3.9).
so you ll be
Note: If you want to select a different one-touch key, press that key now.
If you do want to enter or change this Location ID, go on to step 9.
If you do not want to enter or change this Location ID, skip to step 10.
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for
this one-touch number, the LCD now shows either:
3
4
Enter the Location ID by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review
Entering characters , page 1.12.) A number s Location ID may be up to 24
characters in length.
9
02:Fax Number
_
02:Fax Number
9-1-555-987-6543_
or
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may
want to review Special dialing characters, page 3.1.) The number can be up
to 40 characters in length:
10
11
The LCD now displays:
02:Group No.
_
02:Group No.
2,6_
or
02:Fax Number
9-/1-5559292039_
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review
Call groups, left column.)
Your LCD can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
3.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you do want to enter or change the call group number, go on to step 12.
If you do not want to enter or change this number s call group, go to step 13.
Erasing a one-touch number
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 1, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the one-touch number
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32
possible call groups, numbered 1 32.
you have already entered:
12
Select One-Touch
Here, we ve entered 3 to assign this one-touch number to Call Group 3:
01:9-1-555-345-6789
02:Group No.
3_
Note: If the one-touch number that appears is other than 01, it means that
01 is empty.
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a
Press the key for the one-touch number you want to erase.
Here, we ve selected 02:
2
comma after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP
.
For example, if you enter 3, GROUP , 1, 6, GROUP , 2, 7 to assign this one-touch
number to Call Groups 3, 16 and 27, the LCD shows:
Select One-Touch
02:9-1-555-987-6543
02:Group No.
3,16,27_
If you want to erase a number stored in a different one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Help fu l tip : To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press ENTER.
13
The LCD will display the next empty one-touch number.
If you want to enter this one-touch number, go back to step 3.
If you do not want to enter any more one-touch numbers, press STOP to finish.
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed one-touch number but do
want to enter another one-touch number, go back to step 2.
02:Erase One-Touch
Check Enter/Cancel
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the one-touch number
you ve selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
Press ENTER to erase the number.
Use the autodialer labels in your fax s packaging to write down the stored numbers
for easy reference.
5
Erase One-Touch
** Complete **
To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2 5. Or press STOP to return to
standby mode.
Printing a list of one-touch numbers
Forgot which number is stored in which one-touch key? Just print a list of your one-
touch numbers. The list includes each key s number, the Location ID (if any),
fax/telephone number and group number(s) you ve stored in the key.
To print a list of one-touch numbers, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 6, ENTER.
3.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you specified real time transmission:
One-touch fax dialing
To dial a fax call using a one-touch number:
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document s width and resolution settings:
Place the the document in the ADF, or on the FBS glass.
1
2
Plano Office
A4 Normal
If you are using the FBS glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
Note: If the entry doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-
ner, transmitting as it goes. (To review Real time transmission, see page 2.3.)
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
3
4
Press the one-touch key in which you ve stored the number.
What happens next depends on whether you specified memory transmission or
real time transmission:
One-touch phone dialing
To dial a phone call using a one-touch number, you must have an optional handset
attached to your machine. (Contact your authorized Muratec dealer to order an
optional handset.)
If you specified Quick Memory transmission:
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials
the other fax machine.
To make the call:
While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document s width and resolution settings:
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:
1
Lift the handset
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker
Press the one-touch key in which you ve stored the number. As the machine
dials, it shows the number on the LCD:
Note: If the entry doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document
directly from memory. (To review Quick memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
2
** Tel Mode **
9-555-2842_
If you specified normal memory transmission:
Note: Remember that your fax machine s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.
If you dialed by using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to
the person that answers.
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory first, then dials the
other fax machine.
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document s width and resolution settings:
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
Plano Office
A4 Normal
hang up.
Note:If the entry doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the document directly from
memory. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
3.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Using speed-dial numbers
The LCD now displays either:
7
Your fax machine will store up to 145 speed-dial numbers, designated by three-digit
005:Alt. No.
_
005:Alt. No.
9-1-555-789-3556_
or
identifier codes from 001 through 145.
Entering or changing a speed-dial number
You now have the option to enter (or change) an alternative number. Your fax
machine will dial this alternative number during a transmission after all
redial attempts to the regular number fail. If the alternative number also
fails, the fax alarm beeps to alert you to a problem.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 2, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows an empty speed-dial
1
number:
Enter Speed-Dial No.
001:No Number Stored
Note: You can enter one alternative number for one speed-dial or one-touch
number you entered. Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative
numbers in all, that is, only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can
have the alternative number. After you have entered the alternative
numbers for 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers, your machine will
no longer show this display.
Note: If a speed-dial number other than 001 appears on the LCD, it means
you have already entered a number for 001.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired speed-dial number s three-digit
2
identifier code. Here, we ve entered 005 and the LCD shows either:
If you do want to enter (or change) an alternative number, enter it now.
This number can be up to 40 characters long.
If you do not want to enter or change an alternative number, go on to step 8.
Enter Speed-Dial No.
005:No Number Stored
Enter Speed-Dial No.
005:9-555-397-0123
or
Press ENTER.
8
9
Im p or ta n t: When entering the identifier code for speed-dial numbers less
than 100, you must enter leading zeros to make three digits.
For example, 001-099.
The LCD now shows:
005:Name ;Upper
_
005:Name ;Lower
W est Coast Sales_
or
If you want to select a different speed-dial number, press that number s three-
digit identifier code now. That number appears on the LCD.
3
4
The machine is now prompting you for a name a Location ID
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 3.9).
so you ll be
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for
this speed-dial number, the LCD now shows either:
If you do want to enter or change this number s Location ID, go on to step 10.
If you don t want to enter or change this number s Location ID, skip to step 11.
005:Fax Number
_
005:Fax Number
9-555-397-0123_
or
Enter the Location ID by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review
Entering characters , page 1.12) A number s Location ID may be up to 24
characters in length.
10
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may
want to review Special dialing characters, page 3.1.)
5
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
11
12
The number can be up to 40 characters in length:
The LCD now shows:
005:Fax Number
9-1-555-567-1234_
005:Group No.
_
005:Group No.
1,4,12_
or
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review
Call groups, page 3.8.)
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER to store it.
6
If you do want to enter or change the call group number, go on to step 13.
3.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you do not want to enter or change this number s call group, skip to step 14.
Erasing a speed-dial number
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32
possible call groups, numbered 1 32.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 2, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the speed-dial number
you have already entered:
13
1
Here, we ve entered 6 to assign this speed-dial number to Call Group 6:
Enter Speed-Dial No.
001:9-555-584-6950
005:Group No.
6_
Note: If the speed-dial number that appears is other than 001, it means
that 001 is empty.
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma
after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP.
Here, we ve entered 6, GROUP, 1, 7, GROUP, 3, 0 to assign this speed-dial num-
ber to Call Groups 6, 17 and 30:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial
number you want to erase. Here, we ve selected 005:
2
Enter Speed-Dial No.
005:9-1-555-987-6543
005:Group No.
6,17,30_
If you want to erase a different speed-dial number than the one that appears
on the LCD, enter that number now.
3
Help fu l tip : To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).
Press ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
14
4
The LCD will display the next empty speed-dial number.
005:Erase Speed-Dial
Check Enter/Cancel
If you want to enter this speed-dial number, go back to step 4.
If you do not want to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press STOP to finish.
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed speed-dial number but do
want to enter another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the speed-dial number you ve
selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase Speed-Dial
** Complete **
To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2 5. Or press STOP to return to
standby mode.
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers
You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each number s
three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group numbers
you ve stored for that speed-dial number.
To print a list of speed-dial numbers, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 7, ENTER.
3.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document s width and resolution settings:
Fax dialing via speed-dial
To dial a fax call using a speed-dial number:
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Place the document in the ADF, or on the FBS glass.
1
2
Note: If the speed-dial entry doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly
from memory. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
If you are using the FBS glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
3
4
If you specified real time transmission:
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document s width and resolution settings:
Enter Speed-Dial No.
S_
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD shows the
Location ID (or fax number) you stored:
5
Note: If the speed-dial number doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-
ner, transmitting as it goes. (To review the Real time transmission, see page 2.3)
Plano Office
S018_
Phoning via speed-dial
To dial a phone call using a speed-dial number, you must have an optional handset
attached to your machine. To make the call:
Press START.
6
What happens next depends on whether you specified memory transmission or real
time transmission:
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:
1
Lift the handset
If you specified quick memory transmission:
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials
the other fax machine.
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:
2
** Tel Mode **
S_
While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document s width and resolution settings:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial
number you want to dial. As the machine dials, it shows the number on the
LCD:
Plano Office
A4 Normal
3
Note: If the entry doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document
directly from memory. (To review Quick memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
** Tel Mode **
9-555-5783_
Note: Remember that your fax machine s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.
If you dialed using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the
person that answers!
If you specified normal memory transmission:
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory, then dials the other
fax machine.
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
hang up.
3.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
For example, the directory might show:
Call group dialing
If you frequently send the same fax message to more than one location, store the
group number into the one-touch key or speed-dial number. (If necessary, see Using
a one-touch keys and Using speed-dial numbers , in previous page.)
No. Location
00
10
20
30
[01]Carson Co
[02]Tex. Ofc. 1
[03]e.e.gummi
4
0
4
After you store the group number, you can send the same fax to many different loca-
0
2
tions using GROUP key.
S001And Sew I 2 4
S002KC Enterp
7 0
1
S003Katz Cat 12345678901234567890123456789012
Send a fax via call group
Note: The call group dialing can be used only with memory transmission.
In this list, one-touch number 01 ([01]) is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number
02 ([02]) is in group 1; one-touch number 03 ([03]) is in groups 20 and 32; speed-dial
number 001 (S001) is in call groups 2 and 4; speed-dial number 002 (S002) is in
groups 7, 10 and 21; and speed-dial number 003 (S003) is in all groups, 1 to 32.
Place the document in the ADF, or on the FBS glass. And adjust resolution and
contrast if necessary.
1
If you are using the FBS glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
2
To print a call group directory, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 9, ENTER.
Press GROUP
.
3
Enter Group No.
G
Use the numeric keypad to enter the group number you want to send a fax.
4
Note: If you want to send a fax to several groups at a time, press BROADCAST
then repeat steps 2 3. Also, you can include the one-touch location,
speed-dial location and up to 30 manually dialed number. (See
Broadcasting, page 3.10.)
Press START.
5
Printing a call group directory
Your machine can also print a call group directory. This lists all your stored autodialer
numbers by Location ID and lists the groups to which these numbers belong.
The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 01 09 (the list shows 00), 10 19
(the list shows 10), 20 29 (the list shows 20) and 30 32 (the list shows 30). If you spec-
ify call group 0 (which puts the number in all call groups), the directory shows all
numbers (see right column).
3.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If an EasyDial call fails
If an EasyDial call fails, what happens next depends upon the kind of call it was.
EasyDial directory dialing
EasyDial directory dialing makes your autodialer even more like an electronic
phone book. EasyDial sorts and displays numbers alphabetically according to their
Location IDs, so you can find them and dial them easily.
If it wa s a fa x ca ll
Your fax machine automatically redials the number according to the redial inter-
val you ve set. It keeps trying until either of the following occurs:
To dial using EasyDial:
It successfully reaches the other number
For a regular phone call: Pick up the optional handset.
1
It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected
(see Changing redial settings, page 4.5).
Note: To make a regular phone call from your machine, you must have an
optional handset attached.
If it was a regular phone call
For a fax call: Place the document in ADF, or on the FBS glass. And adjust reso-
lution and contrast if necessary.
You ll have to redial manually:
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice. The LCD shows the first listing in your fax
machine s EasyDial directory:
Lifting the optional handset.
2
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
Telephone Index [A]
ABC Company
:[01]
View Redial History
0:1234567890
The EasyDial directory sorts entries alphabetically in the following order:
(1) by alphabet, (2) by number and (3) by symbol.
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers you ve dialed.
3
Press
or
until the dial number you want to redial appears.
If the listing that appears is the one you want to dial, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, proceed to next step.
Press START.
4
Scroll through the listings to find the one you want. You do this by pressing
the following cursor key:
3
4
or
the first character of the Location ID.
or to check different listings within that character set.
to select the character set alphabet, number or symbol for
Note: The scrolling is open-ended. For example, when you run out of
listings beginning with alphabet , pressing or automatically
A
moves you into listings beginning with other characters.
When the LCD displays the name you want to dial, press START.
If you ve set the document in the ADF, your machine will start the fax
transmission.
If you ve set the document on the FBS glass, enter you document size by
pressing DOCUMENT SIZE, then press START. Your machine will start the fax
transmission.
If you make a regular phone call, speak after a person answered.
3.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Broadcasting
The fastest way to fax one document to many recipients is to broadcast it.
Delayed broadcasting
What if you want the broadcast to take place later? That s the purpose of setting up
a delayed broadcast.
In an ordinary broadcast, you send the fax as you normally would, except you just
add more fax numbers. You can enter up to 230 numbers:
30 manually-dialed numbers AND
Note: Delayed commands are discussed on pages 2.8 and 2.9. And you may want
200 autodialer numbers OR 1 call group with all 200 autodialer numbers
to read Delayed transmission on page 3.11 before proceeding.
You ca n br oa d ca st u sin g a n y fu n ction th a t r equ ir es a fa x n u m ber to be
en ter ed . That means you can send a delayed broadcast, program a polling broad-
cast and even broadcast to h u b units for F-Code relay broadcast initiation. All of
these are explained in this chapter.
Follow steps 1 4 of Broadcasting basics (left column).
1
2
3
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time (in 24-hour
format) when you want the broadcast to occur.
Here, we ve scheduled it for 10:15 PM on the 30th.
To send a broadcast fax:
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as you would for a
regular fax transmission.
1
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/22:15
Press BROADCAST.
2
3
Enter the first fax number, as usual. Use either a one-touch number, a speed-
dial number, a call group or a regular number dialed from the numeric keypad.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4
5
Press START. Your machine will scan your document into the memory and
return to standby mode, while showing this on the LCD:
To add more fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma. Then enter the number as described in step 3 (pressing GROUP inserts its
own comma). You can send to up to 230 numbers for a broadcast.
4
** Reserved **
Jun 01 2000 17:17
Press Start
[03],S098,G12,9-555_
This means your fax machine is reserved for the delayed broadcast you
just programmed, but it can still be used to send and receive faxes if your
broadcast document is stored in memory.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to erase them.
Press START. Your fax machine scans the document into memory and then
sends it to each number or call group you ve entered.
5
Making changes to broadcasts
If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it up, use the
REVIEW COMMANDS function. See Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast, page
2.8.
3.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Delayed transmission
Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed
transmission. Your fax machine can store up to 99 delayed commands, each of which
you can program up to 31 days in advance.
When the date and time are entered, press ENTER to save the delayed trans-
mission. The LCD shows:
5
Enter Fax Number
_
Im p or ta n t: If you program all 99 delayed transmission commands, no further
memory transmission is possible until one or more of the commands is
completed. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.) However, if
all 99 delayed commands are programmed, you can always transmit
with the Real time transmission from ADF (see page 2.3).
Enter the fax number for the delayed transmission document. You can either
press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number or use the numeric keypad
to enter the fax number.
6
7
Press START. Your machine returns to standby mode, while showing this on
the LCD:
Setting up a delayed transmission
Im p or ta n t: Your machine only remembers the day of the month that it s supposed
to send a delayed transmission. It does not remember the month
itself. So if you want to send a transmission at 5:05 PM on J u n e 26,
don t program the transmission sooner than 5:06 PM on Ma y 26.
** Reserved **
Jan 29 2000 17:17
This means your fax machine is reserved for the delayed transmission you
just programmed.
To set up a delayed transmission:
If you set the machine for memory transmission, it will scan the document
into memory, after which you can use the machine normally.
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
If you set the machine for non-memory transmission (real time transmis-
sion), the machine can receive faxes but can t transmit until your delayed
command has been performed.
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS. The LCD shows:
1.Delayed
Im p or ta n t: If you specified the delayed non-memory transmission (real
time transmission), do not remove the document in ADF. If the
document is removed from ADF before a delayed command com-
pletes, it cancels the delayed real time transmission.
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the current day of the month, followed by the
current time (in 24-hour format):
3
4
Delayed
Enter Time: 06/17:16
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and the time when you
want the fax to send the delayed transmission.
Note: Press
to move the cursor left, or
to move it right.
Here, we ve set the transmission to occur on the 11th at 11:05 PM:
Delayed
Enter Time: 11/23:05
3.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Batch transmission
Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic basket
throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one location.
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press to scroll to the left or to scroll to the right.
To do this, just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go. When
that date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch
box to the remote fax machine. You can store up to 40 documents (each document
can include one page or many pages) into your machine s five electronic batch boxes.
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER. The LCD now shows:
6
7
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 26/14:00
Instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following ways:
Op tion 1:
Once at a certain time on a certain day of the month (For exam-
ple: Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th. ) Use the numeric keypad
to enter the date and time (24-hour format) the machine should
send the documents from the batch box:
Creating or modifying a batch box
Before sending a batch transmission, you have to create batch boxes in your fax
machine. The steps below also let you modify existing batch boxes.
To create or modify a batch box:
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 5, 0, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already
have a number entered for batch box 1, the LCD shows:
1
Op tion 2:
At a certain time each day you press the key (For example: Do
this at 5:05 PM today. ) Use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0
(00), and then the time when the fax should send the documents
from the batch box:
Select Batch Box
1:No Number Stored
Select Batch Box
1:9-1-555-345-6789
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box you want
to create or modify. Here, we ve pressed 3 and see either:
2
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Select Batch Box
3:No Number Stored
Select Batch Box
3:9-555-2110
or
Note: To change a digit in the date or the time, press
to move the cursor
left or to move it right. Then enter the correct number.
If you want to select a different batch box than the one displayed on the LCD,
use the numeric keypad to enter the batch box number now.
3
4
When the date and time are set, press ENTER.
8
9
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
The LCD now shows:
3:Fax Number
_
3:Fax Number
9-555-2110_
or
3:Name ;Upper
_
3:Name ;Lower
Bookkeeping_
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number exactly as your machine
should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires.
(You may want to review Special dialing characters, page 3.1.) The number
can be up to 40 characters in length:
5
The machine now asks you to name this batch box.
If you do not want to enter or change this batch box s name, skip to step 11.
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering
characters , page 1.12) A batch box s name may be up to 24 characters in
length.
10
3:Fax Number
9-1-555-871-9052_
3.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Im p or ta n t: Your machine gives each document in a batch box a file number,
Press ENTER to save the batch box information.
11
shown as 1 above. You will need to know this file number should
you later wish to erase or print the stored document. Each
batch box holds up to 40 files (1-40).
To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2 11.
To finish, press stop.
Press START. The machine displays Reserved on the top line of the LCD.
This means the document is stored in memory.
5
Printing a list of batch boxes
You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each box s identifier
number, the Location ID, fax number and date/time the transmission should start.
Printing a list of stored batch documents
You can print a list of the documents stored in your machine s batch boxes. This list
provides you with the documents file numbers so you can erase or print them as
needed.
To print the list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 5, ENTER.
To print the list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 6, ENTER.
Storing a document for batch transmission
Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents (each document can include one
page or many pages) in each batch box until the date and time you designate the
batch transmission to take place. Once the batch documents are transmitted, they
are automatically erased from the machine s memory.
Printing a document stored in a batch box
To print a document stored in a batch box:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 3, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
The batch box must exist on your fax machine.
1
Batch Document
Enter Box No. :_
You must know the batch box s one-digit number (1 5).
To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box storing the
document you want to print. Here, we ve entered 1 to indicate batch box 1.
2
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS five times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
1:Batch Document
Enter File No. :_
Batch Tx
Enter Box No. :_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document s file number (1 40).
4
5
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit number for the batch box you
want to use. Here, we ve entered 5 to indicate batch box 5.
3
Press ENTER.
Batch Tx
Enter Box No. :5
Your fax machine prints the document, then returns to standby mode.
Note: Tx is a common abbreviation for transmission.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
4
Press Start
Box :5 File : 1
3.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a document stored in a batch box
Erasing an empty batch box
Batch boxes must be empty to be erased. If a box has documents stored in it, then
you first have to erase those documents. See left column.
To erase a document stored in a batch box on your fax machine:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 2, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
To erase an empty batch box:
Batch Document
Enter Box No. :_
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 5, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Batch Box
Select Batch Box
1:9-5551023
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box storing the
document you want to erase. Here, we ve entered 1 to indicate batch box 1.
1:No Number Stored
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box you want
to erase. Here, we ve pressed 2 and see:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
2
3
1:Batch Document
Enter File No. :_
Select Batch Box
2:9-1-972-5559900
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document s file number (1 40).
4
5
If you want to erase a different batch box than what appears on the LCD, enter
that batch box s number now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The fax machine now gives you one last chance to change your
mind before erasing the document.
Press ENTER. If the batch box is empty, the LCD shows:
1:Batch Document
Check Enter/Stop
2:Erase Batch Box
Check Enter/Cancel
Im p or ta n t: To quit the operation without erasing this or any document,
Im p or ta n t: If you select a batch box which is not empty, the machine beeps
press STOP. The machine returns to standby mode.
and briefly shows:
Press ENTER. The fax machine erases the document you ve chosen, then
returns to standby mode.
6
Select Batch Box
Document Stored
Erase any documents stored in the batch box (see left column),
then go back to step 3.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the batch box you ve
selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press STOP.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER to erase the batch box.
5
Erase Batch Box
** Complete **
To erase another batch box, repeat steps 2 5. To finish, press STOP.
3.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Polling
Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or
pay for it. There are several kinds of polling:
Being polled
Not only can you poll, but you can also be polled. To set up a document for regular
polling:
Regula r polling Your fax retrieves a document from a remote fax machine.
F-Code polling Your fax retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote fax
machine. To do this, you must be communicating with another F-code-compatible
fax machine. For more information on F-Code polling, see F-Code communication,
pages 3.35.
If your fax machine is set for Tel Ready reception, change it to the reception
mode except the Tel Ready.
1
Im p or ta n t: Your machine ca n t be polled if it s in Tel Ready mode.
Note: For polling to work, the remote machine must also be set up to be polled.
Insert the document.
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. (Your fax machine will be trans-
mitting to the machine doing the polling.)
Regular polling
To set up your machine for regular polling:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 1, 0, 1, ENTER.
Your fax will scan the document into memory and return to standby mode.
4
Make sure the document is inserted in the remote fax machine.
1
2
Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored, your fax machine auto-
matically erases the document from memory.
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS twice and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Enter Fax Number
_
Printing a stored polling document
To print a document you ve stored for regular polling without erasing it,
Enter the remote fax machine s number by either pressing a one-touch key,
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.
3
press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 3, 0, 1, ENTER.
To perform the regular polling now, skip to step 8.
To perform delayed regular polling, go on to step 5.
4
Erasing a stored polling document
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
5
To erase a document you ve stored for regular polling from your machine s memory,
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 2, 0, 1, ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time (use the 24-hour format)
when your machine should perform the delayed regular polling.
6
Limiting polling access to your fax machine
When you set the passcode, a calling fax which doesn t present the proper pass-
code cannot poll from your fax.
Press ENTER.
7
Press START.
8
Im p or ta n t: The passcode you use for polling operation is n ot the same as the pro-
tection passcode (see page 3.50).
When your machine polls for documents, it dials the number and, upon making con-
tact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other machine
had placed the call.
3.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Note: If you re using the Block Junk Fax feature (see pages 3.54 3.55), even
incoming calls which meet the passcode test must come from phone num-
bers you ve approved.
To set your fax machine s passcode:
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001 9999) you want to use. Wr ite it down ,
and put it in a safe place.
1
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows the current code:
2
Passcode
Passcode
:0000
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired four-digit passcode.
3
4
Passcode
Passcode
:5627
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Note: To turn off the limiting polling, change the passcode to 0000 by repeating
steps 1 4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Special features
Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communication eas-
ier. We ll cover them here.
Setting the Soft Key
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Soft Key No.
1:Report
Soft keys
Soft Keys are shortcut keys. You can program the soft keys on the control panel to
turn on or off any function with just the touch of a button. Your machine has three
Soft Keys. If the light above any one of these keys glows, that means the setting
programmed into that key is active.
. . . or indicates another function you ve stored into this key.
Press
or
until the Soft Key (1-3) you want to change appears. In this
2
3
example, we ve chosen 3.
These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or off:
Confirmation report (see page 3.22)
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3:Monitor/Call
Memory transmission (see page 2.3)
← →
/ /Enter
Monitor / Call request (see pages 2.6 and 3.25)
Press
or
until the function appears that you want to program into the
Note: The keys that are programmed at the factory turn the functions above them
on and off, but only for the next transmission that you send from your fax
machine. Once that transmission is complete, your machine returns to its
default setting.
But instead of using the Soft Keys to control the functions above, you can program
them to turn other functions on or off. These functions are:
4
5
key. In this example, we ve chosen Cover page.
3:Cover Page
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD will display the next Soft Key.
If you do want to set this Soft Key, go back step 3.
If you do not want to set the currently displayed Soft Key but do want to set
another Soft Key, go back to step 2.
If you do not want to set any more Soft Keys, press STOP to finish.
Energy saving (see page 4.9)
Fax & Copy (see page 3.21)
Send TTI (see pages 1.18 and 4.2)
Security reception (see page 3.50)
Cover page (see page 3.23)
Now you can use the labels included in your machine s original packaging to label
the Soft Key function you just set.
Sort copy (see pages 2.13 and 2.16)
Negative / Positive copy (see page 2.16)
Combine (only for MFX-1600) (see page 2.17)
Copy / Fax mode (see page 1.11)
Note: And instead of just turning the function on or off for the next transmission,
as the factory-set keys do, changing the Soft Key settings actually sets the
default for your fax machine. (These default settings can be changed, if
necessary. They are not permanent.)
3.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Docu m en t stor a ge:
Macro keys
Regular polling documents (page 3.15)
F-Code polling documents (pages 3.30 3.31)
If you perform the same operation repeatedly, you can automate the operation using
a macro. A macro is a series of the several steps that you group together as a single
command to accomplish the operation automatically.
Com m u n ica tion s fu n ction s:
Delayed transmission (explained on pages 3.11)
Broadcasting (page 3.10)
A macro key faithfully records up to 60 steps that you performed to teach the macro.
You can teach the Macro keys to carry out any of the following jobs, but you cannot
teach the operation regarding the machine settings.
Regular polling (pages 3.15 3.16)
Batch transmission (pages 3.12 3.14)
F-Code transmission (page 3.34)
F-Code polling (page 3.35)
Note: One Macro key can hold only one job. It cannot combine two or more jobs.
Copy:
All copy settings
P r in tou ts:
Programming the Macro key
Machine settings list (page 4.10)
Fax settings list (page 4.10)
Press MACRO P ROGRAM, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Macro Key
Copy settings list (page 4.10)
M1:No Number Stored
Activity journal (page 3.22)
Delayed commands list (page 2.9)
Delayed commands documents (page 2.9)
One-touch list (page 3.3)
Press the Macro key (M1 or M2) you want to program or change. In this exam-
ple, we ve chosen M2.
2
Select Macro Key
M2:No Number Stored
Speed-dial list (page 3.6)
Programmable one-touch numbers list (page 3.49)
Call group directory (page 3.8)
Blocked numbers list (page 3.55)
Sample cover page (page 3.24)
Press ENTER. If you chose the key already programmed, proceed to step 4.
Otherwise, skip to step 5.
3
The LCD shows:
4
Overwrite?
Check Enter/Cancel
Department time list (page 3.57)
List of F-Code boxes (page 3.30)
List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (page 3.30)
Batch transmission documents (page 3.13)
Batch box list (page 3.13)
If you want to overwrite the operation already programmed, press ENTER.
If you want to overwrite only the job s name, press CANCEL and go to step 9.
If you do not want to overwrite the key you have choice, press STOP
.
The LCD of stand-by mode appears, which means the machine is ready to reg-
ister the steps into the Macro key.
List of stored batch documents (page 3.13)
F-Code Box (bulletin box) documents (page 3.31)
Macros list (page 3.20)
5
Fax Ready
Jun 1 2000 13:30
Stored polling documents (page 3.15)
Security receive documents (page 3.51)
Note: It keeps beeping during the job registration in order to make notice of
the registration mode.
3.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Copying with the Macro key
To copy using a Macro key:
Press the keys exactly as you operate the job you want to program into the
Macro key.
6
Note: You can program up to 60 steps. When it comes over 60 steps, your fax
Insert the document.
1
2
3
machine asks if you register the operations you have entered. If you
want to register them, press ENTER. If not, press STOP
.
Press the Ma cr o k ey in which you ve stored the copy command.
Note: If you want to cancel the operations you have set, press
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.
MACRO P ROGRAM, STOP and then go back to step 1.
Example 1: To program some operations for copy: Press COP Y/F AX to change
the copy mode, and set number of the copies, paper size, contrast, resolution,
reduction/enlargement rate and sort setting as you want.
Printing lists using the Macro key
To print a list using a Macro key:
Note: See Making copies (pages 2.12 2.18) for detail operations.
Press the Ma cr o k ey in which is programmed for the printing lists.
1
2
Example 2: To program the operations for printing the one-touch numbers
list: Press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 6, ENTER.
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTER in the Macro key.
If you programmed ENTER or START into the operation, proceed to step 8.
Otherwise, press MACRO P ROGRAM and skip to step 9.
Storing fax documents with the Macro key
To store a fax document for either polling or F-Code polling using a Macro key:
7
8
If you want to start immediately after pressing the Macro key when you use
it, press ENTER. If not, press CANCEL.
Insert the document.
1
2
Note: If you want to confirm the settings or operations in the Macro key
Press the Ma cr o k ey which is programmed for the storing operation you
want to use.
before you start it, press CANCEL here.
Include Start/Enter?
Check Enter/Cancel
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTER in the Macro key.
3
Fax dialing with the Macro key
To dial a fax call using a Macro key:
The LCD now shows:
9
M2:Name
_
;Upper
M2:
Name ;Upper
Insert the document.
or
1
2
Delayed_
Press the Ma cr o k ey in which you ve stored the fax communication com-
mand.
The machine now asks you to name this job.
If you do not want to enter or change this job s name, skip to step 11.
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.
3
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering
characters , page 1.12) A job s name may be up to 130 characters in length.
10
11
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
** Reserved **
Jan 29 2000 17:17
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,
the LCD shows the number:
9-1-972-555-4335
A4 Normal
3.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a Macro key
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. The possible settings are:
2
3
Press MACRO P ROGRAM twice, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Macro Speed :Norm
← →
1
2
3
/ /Enter
Select Macro Key
M1:Activity journal
Macro Speed :Slow
← →
/ /Enter
Press the Macro key (M1 or M2) you want to erase. Here, we ve chosen M2.
Select Macro Key
M2:Batch box list
Macro Speed :Fast
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Erase Macro
Check Enter/Cancel
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the Macro key you ve
selected, press CANCEL. The machine will return to step 2.
Press ENTER to erase the job.
4
Erase Macro
** Complete **
To erase another Macro key, repeat steps 2 4. Or press STOP to return to standby
mode.
Printing a list of your Macro keys
Your fax machine can print a list of the Macro keys.
The list includes:
(1) each key s Macro key number
(2) the name of the job stored in the Macro key
To print a list of Macro keys, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 7, ENTER.
Setting the speed for Macros
You can adjust the speed of one step in the Macro key.
Press MACRO P ROGRAM three times, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Macro Speed :Norm
← →
/ /Enter
3.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want for each page
Fax & Copy
5
6
in the document. Choose from 01 to 99 copies.
With the Fax & Copy feature turned on, your machine asks if you want to make a
copy of a document each time it transmits that document from memory.
Note: If you want to quit without transmitting and copying the document,
press STOP . The machine returns to standby mode.
Note: The Fax & Copy function cannot be used for real time transmission, and
Press START to begin the transmission and copying process.
when the copy protection feature is set to on.
Note: Quick Memory transmission (see page 2.3) and the Fax & Copy function
cannot be used at the same time. If both are turned on, Quick Memory will
not work.
Help fu l tip : If you do not wish to make a copy, press CANCEL in step 4. The LCD will
show:
Canceled Copying
Start/Stop
Note: The Fax & Copy feature will use the same resolution you set for the trans-
mission for the copy s scanning resolution.
To cancel the making copy, press START. The machine start transmis-
sion process without copying the document.
Setting the Fax & Copy function
If you press STOP , the machine return to step 4.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 6, ENTER.
1
Fax & Copy
:Off
← →
/ /Enter
Setting the activity journal
Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine
keeps an activity journal which records its 100 most recent fax transactions. The
activity journal lists the following information for each transaction:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Fax & Copy
:On
/ /Enter
Assigned number, starting each day at 001
Remote location called
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Resolution mode
3
4
Starting date and time
Press STOP to return to standby mode.
Duration, in minutes and seconds
Length, in number of pages
Department code (see page 3.56)
Using the Fax & Copy function
Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.
Result of the call If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM
communication (see page 4.1)
1
Note: With this function, you cannot select normal and halftone resolution.
Any special operations
will appear as Manual
For example, a fax call made using an optional handset
Enter the fax number. Either press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number,
call group number or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number.
2
Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transac-
tions. To toggle this automatic printing on or off:
If you entered the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, go on to step 3.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 1, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press START.
1
3
4
Journal AutoPrt.:Off
The LCD changes copy mode and asks the number of copies you want to make.
← →
/ /Enter
Fax & Copy
Ltr [ Ltr ] 100%
1
3.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs
Your fax machine can print reports of transmissions and receptions.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
Here, we ve chosen On.
There are two different reports: a transmit confirmation report (TCR) and a receive
confirmation report (RCR). You can receive a TCR after sending a fax to any Group 3 fax
machine, but the RCR function works only when you send a fax to a compatible Muratec
machine. (Consult your authorized Muratec dealer with any questions about such
compatibility.) Choose the type of report you want, based on the fax machines to
which you re transmitting.
Journal AutoPrt.:On
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Printing an activity journal manually
To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be
completed, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 4, ENTER.
What the reports tell you
TCR
Setting the printing order of the activity journal
Your fax machine prints the activity journal for every fax transaction. For example,
if your machine has to redial a call, it will list those redials on the journal.
The TCR lists the following information for each communication:
Date and time of the TCR s printout
Remote location called
If you want to list those activities in the order of their assigned numbers, you can
change the printing order of the activity journal. To change the printing order:
Resolution mode
Starting date and time
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 1, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Duration, in minutes and seconds
Length, in number of pages
Result of the call
Journal Line Up :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Any special operations
will appear as Manual
For example, a fax call made using an optional handset
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
If you want the activity journal to print in the order of assigned number,
choose On .
Otherwise, the machine will list every fax transaction of the same command
and same location.
Sample of the document
An image of the first page of the document
If an error occurs, the TCR tells you the remote location which was called, the error
code and error message (see pages 5.9 5.11).
Here, we ve chosen On.
RCR
The RCR lists the following information for each communication:
Date and time
Journal Line Up :On
← →
/ /Enter
Remote location called
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Assigned number, starting each day at 001
Resolution mode
Duration, in minutes and seconds
Length, in number of pages
Result of the call Either OK or an error code (see pages 5.9 5.10)
3.22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
To set the printing one of these reports:
Cover page
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 1, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Your fax machine can store a cover page to send at the beginning of each outgoing
fax. This page includes the current date and time, your Location ID and your fax
number (as stored in the TTI) and a message of up to 40 characters in length. The
information appears in a box similar to this:
1
TCR Selected
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
3
Here, we ve chosen RCR.
Fax Message From:
Jun 1 2000 14:00
RCR Selected
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows:
Name:
And Sew It Goes Co.
972-555-2009
Fax Number:
Auto Print :Off
← →
/ /Enter
[We appreciate your business. Thank you!]
Your machine is asking if it should print the selected report automatically
after every fax you send.
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
4
5
Here, we ve chosen On.
Turning the cover page on
Auto Print
:On
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 2, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
← →
Cover Page :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
To tell the fax machine it should send a cover page before each document you
2
transmit, press
or
until On appears on the LCD.
To turn the confirmation report feature on or off for only the next fax transmission,
press REP ORT.
Cover Page
:On
What happens next depends on the setting you chose:
← →
/ /Enter
If the light above the REP ORT key glows, the fax machine will print the
confirmation report automatically.
Note: To tell the machine not to send a cover page, press
or
until Off
appears on the LCD and press STOP
.
If the light above the REP ORT key doesn t glow, the fax machine will not print a
confirmation report.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the example
as We appreciate your business. Thank you! ) is blank. To enter that message, see
Entering the cover page message, next page.
After you send this transmission, your machine returns to the setting you chose in
step 2, above.
3.23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Entering the cover page message
OneLine + distinctive ring detection
Many phone companies now offer their customers a special service which makes it
possible for one phone line to do the work of two.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 2, 0, 2, ENTER.
1
2
Use the one-touch keypad to enter a message for the cover page. Enter the
message the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. The
message can be up to 40 characters in length.
With this service, you physically still have one phone line, but, electronically, you
have two phone numbers. Your phone recognizes these different numbers and rings
differently for each one.
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters
For example, this makes it easy for you to have both a business number and a home
number on one phone line, so you can answer one with Jane Doe Consulting, and
the other with Hello. This works because you can tell the difference between the
distinctive patterns of the two rings.
by using the one-touch keys.
When the message appears as you want it, press ENTER to save it.
3
Your fax machine is also smart enough to tell the difference between two different
numbers that are ringing it. All you have to do is set up your machine for the
OneLine + distinctive ring detection (DRD) feature.
Printing the cover page
To confirm that the cover page is set correctly, print a sample cover page from your
fax machine. Press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 1, ENTER.
In order to use OneLine + DRD, your phone company must set up your distinctive
ring service. When it does, it will assign a ring pattern. For example, the standard
telephone ring is 2 seconds on (ringing) and 4 seconds off (silent), after which it
repeats itself.
Your fax has eight possible distinctive ring patterns for use with OneLine + DRD.
One of them should work with your phone company s DRD service. This chart lists
the patterns:
Pa tter n
On e com p lete r in g p a tter n (secon d s)
0.8 on, 0.4 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off
0.3 on, 0.2 off, 1.0 on, 0.2 off, 0.3 on, 4.0 off
1.0 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.5 off
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.0 off
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.0 off
0.4 on, 0.6 off, 0.4 on, 4.6 off
1.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.5 off
For example: pattern
C
is 0.3 seconds ringing, 0.2 seconds silent, 1 second ringing,
0.2 seconds silent, 0.3 seconds ringing and 4 seconds silent. Then it goes back to the
first 0.3-second ring and starts over.
3.24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
To use DRD on your fax machine:
Call request
Contact your phone company to make sure it has set up DRD service for you. If
possible, also find out which distinctive ring pattern the phone company has
assigned you.
You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the
same call (although, not at the same time). This is called a call request. It doesn t
matter whether you re sending the fax or receiving it. You may fax first and then
talk, or talk first and then fax.
1
When your machine is MFX-1200; Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 4, ENTER.
When your machine is MFX-1600; Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 5, ENTER.
The LCD shows:
2
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, the remote fax machine must have a similar
call-request capability. Your machine must also have an optional
handset attached.
DRD
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Faxing/receiving first, then talking
To send or receive a fax first and then talk:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
3
Here, we ve chosen On.
While your fax machine is sending or receiving the fax, press MONITOR/CALL.
1
2
DRD
:On
/ /Enter
← →
At the remote fax machine, the ringer will sound after that machine receives
each page.
Press ENTER.
4
5
If someone answers at the remote fax machine, your fax machine will ring
several times. If so, pick up the optional handset. In a few seconds, the line
will open and you can begin your conversation.
3
Ring Pattern
:A
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the pattern you want appears.
Talking first, then sending a fax
To talk first and then send a fax:
Here, we ve chosen
C
.
Ring Pattern
:C
When you ve finished your phone conversation, don t hang up.
1
2
3
4
← →
/ /Enter
Insert the document you want to fax.
Press ENTER to set your machine to the displayed ring pattern.
6
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.
Im p or ta n t: If your telephone company gives you only very general ring pattern
specifications, or if you encounter a problem while using your
machine s DRD feature, p lea se tr y ALL of th e listed r in g p a tter n s.
If you still have a problem after trying a ll of the patterns, please call
the Muratec Customer Support Center. (From the United States, call
800-347-3296.
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up
his/her handset. Don t hang up you r handset yet!
When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your fax machine s
optional handset. Your fax machine will send the document.
5
Im p or ta n t: With your machine set for using DRD, it won t respond to any ring pat-
tern other than the one you selected above. To reset the fax so it will
respond once again to normal rings, repeat steps 2 4, a b ove except,
in step 3, toggle it to Off. Your fax will now respond normally.
Talking first, then receiving a fax
To talk first and then receive a fax:
When you ve finished your phone conversation, don t hang up.
1
2
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up
his/her handset. Don t hang up your handset yet!
When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your machine s optional
handset. Your machine will receive the document and print it out.
3
3.25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Responding to a call request
If someone requests a call from you during a fax communication, you ll hear a long
F-Code Boxes
ring after the receiving machine has received each page. To answer the call request:
F-Code: an introduction
Lift your machine s optional handset, and listen for a few seconds. You may
hear a brief series of fax tones.
The ITU-T, the United Nations agency that standardizes international telecommuni-
cations, has created a fax industry standard for using sub-addressing and
password-based communication. One name for this standard is F-Code, and that s
what we ll call it in these instructions and on your machine s display.
1
Shortly, the line will open and the person at the other end of the line will
answer. You and the other person now can have a normal phone conversation.
2
How sub-addressing works
The power of QuadAccessfi
To help understand sub-addressing, think about how someone in a large company
receives mail. For example, mail for the Accounting department is first delivered to
the company s main mailroom. Then the mailroom routes the mail to Accounting.
Your fax machine s QuadAccess feature sharply reduces the time you might spend
waiting for the machine to finish its work. QuadAccess is a more powerful version of
what already is a pretty powerful feature, called dual access. While a fax with normal
dual access allows you to do two things at once, QuadAccess allows you to do four
operations at once. For example, even if the machine is (1) printing a copy, (2) trans-
mitting from memory and (3) scanning documents for a different memory
transmission, you can still (4) program the machine.
That s the idea behind sub-addressing. Your fax and another F-Code-compatible fax
exchange special signals to indicate just where the fax really should go. It s as if the
sending fax is saying, Deliver this to room 48, and the receiving fax does just that.
Your machine has up to 50 mailboxes for these special deliveries. When someone
sends an F-Code fax to you, your machine receives it into one of those 50 mailboxes
w h i chever box the sender chooses.
Note: If your machine is MFX-1200:
Sending F-Code securely
The MFX-1200 cannot printing and scanning at same time.
If you try to scanning the document during the machine is printing, the
following message will be shown:
For greater security, you can set up a password with each F-Code sub-address,
which lets you use secure transmission, polling and relay broadcasting when com-
municating with any other F-Code compatible fax machine.
OK: Will Scan Soon
Guidelines for using F-Code
(1) To use ITU-T sub-addressing, you must create F-Code boxes in your machine
(2) Your machine holds up to 50 of these boxes
If the machine is printing the lists, the machine will scan the document
after the printing is finished.
If the machine is printing the stored document or received document,
the machine will pause the current printing job and it will give priority
to scanning the document. After scanning is finished, the machine
resumes the printing job.
(3) Your machine stores up to 30 documents into each F-Code box (each document
can include one or more pages)
Creating or modifying an F-Code box
Choosing the F-Code box type
Before you set up an F-Code box, first decide how your callers will use it a s a
bulletin box, a security box or a relay box.
Bu lletin box Stores documents that people in remote locations retrieve by
polling the box. For example, your sales branches could call in at any time to get
a printout of your latest prices that you ve stored in a bulletin box.
A bulletin box stores both scanned and retrieved documents, and it holds its
contents indefinitely (as long as the unit has AC power).
Secu r ity box Receives and stores F-Code secure communications.
3.26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Rela y box Receives documents, then relays them to other machines. The
machine that relays the document is called a h u b . Your fax machine can either
send to a hub or it can be a hub.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the 4-digit
address and not the ITU-T password) and then press ENTER.
I
.
D. code (not the ITU-T sub-
6
7
Note: If you enter an invalid D. code, the fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
The machine is now asking you to name this F-Code box. The LCD shows:
I.
4 elements of an F-Code box
Each F-Code box has the following four elements:
(1) F-Code box number (01-50)
03:Box Name;Upper
_
03:Box Name;Upper
Muratec America_
or
(2) F-Code box name (up to 16 characters)
(3) F-Code sub-address (up to 20 characters - can include numbers and the * and #
characters only)
If you do not want to enter or change this F-Code box s name, skip to step 9.
If you do want to enter or change this F-Code box s name, go on to step 8.
(4) I.D. Code (4 digits)
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering
characters , page 1.12) An F-Code box s name can be up to 16 characters in
length.
You will choose the information for each of these elements, and enter it into your
machine. The following steps will walk you through entering and changing that
information.
8
9
Press ENTER to save the box s name and continue. The LCD shows:
To create or modify an F-Code box:
03:Sub-Address No.
_
03:Sub-Address No.
123456_
Keep pen and paper with you as you follow these steps. As you decide on a
sub-address and enter it into your machine, write it down. Remember to:
(1) write down which box goes with which sub-address, (2) write down any
or
1
The fax machine now asks for this F-Code box s sub-address. This is the
numerical identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote
F-Code compatible fax.
passwords or
place.
I.D. codes you enter, (3) keep these printed records in a safe
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 4, 0, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already
have a name entered for F-Code box 01, the LCD shows:
2
3
If you do not want to change an existing sub-address, skip to step 11.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub-address to identify this F-Code box.
The sub-address can be up to 20 characters in length and include any
combination of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-
numeric characters).
10
11
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:NY Branch Office
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
box you want to create or modify. Here, we ve entered 0, 3 and see either:
03:Sub-Address No.
654321_
Select F-Code Box
03:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
or
Note: No other F-Code box in this machine can have the same sub-address
as the one you enter here.
If want to select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD,
use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit F-Code box number now.
4
5
Press ENTER to save the sub-address.
Note: If you entered a sub-address already being used by another F-Code
Press ENTER. What you do next depends on whether you re creating or
modifying the F-Code box:
If creating skip to step 7.
box, the machine beeps and briefly displays:
03:Sub-Address No.
Sub-Address In Use
If modifying the LCD asks you to enter the proper I.D. code. The LCD shows:
03:Set F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:****
The machine now returns you to step 10. Please enter a different
number for your F-Code box s sub-address.
3.27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Next, the machine asks for your F-Code box s password. This is the password
Rx P r otect
Reception protection tells this box if it s okay to receive
12
documents from remote locations. Callers can then poll these documents.
for ITU-T-compatible F-Code fax transactions. The LCD shows:
Rx Protect :Off
03:Password
_
03:Password
123456789*#_
or
←/→/Enter
On: Open this box to receive documents from callers.
Off: Do not open this box to receive documents from callers.
Note: You don t need to have a password for the F-Code box. However, using
a password will make your F-Code communication much more secure.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
If you do not want to enter or change this box s password, skip to step 14.
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
Use the numeric keypad to enter this box s ITU-T-compatible password. This
password can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combination of
numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numerical characters).
Here, we ve entered 135*7#9.
13
Au to P r in t Automatic printing of received documents tells the fax machine
if it should print a document automatically upon receiving it into this box.
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection (Rx pro-
tect) setting is set to off (see above).
03:Password
135*7#9_
Auto Print :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Note: You cannot change the type of an existing F-Code box. If you re modi-
fying an existing F-Code box and want to change the box type, you
first must erase the old box, then create a new one.
On: Print the document automatically when the box receives it.
Off: Print the document manually, when you want to print it.
Press ENTER to save the password. The LCD now shows:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
14
15
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
Box Type :Bulletin
← →
/ /Enter
Over wr ite Doc Overwriting documents tells your machine if it should
overwrite (erase) existing documents when it receives a new one.
The fax machine is asking which box type you want to assign to this box
bulletin, security or relay.
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection setting is
set to off (see Rx Protect above).
Press
or
until the type of box you want appears.
Overwrite Doc. :Off
Press ENTER.
← →
/ /Enter
If you chose Bulletin, go on to step 16.
If you chose Security, skip to step 17.
If you chose Relay, skip to step 20.
On: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will erase
any documents currently stored in it.
Off: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will not
erase the documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30
documents (each document can include one or more pages) in each box.
If you ch ose Bu lletin :
The bulletin box has four additional settings:
16
Reception protection ( Rx Protect on the LCD)
Automatic printing of received documents ( Auto Print )
Overwriting documents ( Overwrite Doc. )
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
Erasure of transmitted documents ( Erase Tx Doc. )
3.28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Enter the fax number using a one-touch key, a speed-dial number or a call
Er a se Tx Doc
Erasure of transmitted documents tells your machine if it
should erase a document from the box after a caller retrieves (polls) the
document.
21
22
group number. You cannot use the numeric keypad to enter these numbers.
To add each fax number, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma, then enter the number. You can specify up to 200 numbers for a
remote unit.
Erase Tx Doc. :Off
← →
/ /Enter
On: Your machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it. If
you choose On , this box can be polled only once per document.
Off: Your machine does not erase a document from the box when it s polled.
As long as your machine holds AC power and you do not erase the docu-
ment from the box, the document is available indefinitely for polling.
Enter Relay Number
S001,G12_
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:
Select TTI :Sender
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting. Then skip to step 24.
The machine asks for the type of TTI you want to appear on the faxes that are
relayed to other callers.
If you ch ose Secu r ity:
Sen d er R e l ay the document with sender unit s TTI (don t send your TTI).
Both R e l ay the document with both the sender unit s TTI and your TTI.
You r s R e l ay the document with your TTI instead of the sender unit s.
The machine asks how long you want to keep a document stored in your
machine s F-Code box. The LCD shows:
17
F-Code Doc Hold Time
Hold Time (00-31):00
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how many
days (00-31), you want your fax machine to keep received documents in this
F-Code box. Here, we ve entered 09, for nine days:
23
18
Auto Print :Off
← →
/ /Enter
F-Code Doc Hold Time
Hold Time (00-31):09
On: Print the document automatically when it s received.
Off: The machine does not print it, but only relays it to the other machine.
Note: Your fax machine can store incoming documents in F-Code boxes (up
to 30 documents) as long as 31 days, after which it automatically
erases the documents. But if your machine has plenty of memory, you
may want to override the 31-day limit in order to keep the documents
indefinitely. If so, enter 00. If you choose this, you will have to delete
documents manually. (You may want to contact your authorized
Muratec dealer regarding optional memory expansion.)
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Then press ENTER to save the settings and go on to step 24.
The machine asks for your F-Code box s four-digit security
I
.
D. code. This is
24
25
the
I.D. code for the box s security, which you use to (1) print a document any
remote F-Code-compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before
you can make any changes to this F-Code box.
Press ENTER to save the settings. Skip to step 24.
03:Set F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:0000
19
If you ch ose Rela y:
If you do not want to change the
Decide on a four-digit D. code (0001-9999) for this F-Code box.
Wr ite it d ow n , and put it in a safe place.
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.
I.D. code, skip to step 27.
The machine asks for the fax number for the remote unit.
The LCD shows:
20
I
.
Enter Relay Number
_
I
.
3.29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Using a bulletin box
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code for this F-Code box.
26
27
Im p or ta n t: After completing this step, you must know this code to print
Storing a document
documents sent to this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.
Your fax machine can store up to 30 documents in each bulletin box.
Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
The bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.
To create or modify another F-Code box, repeat steps 3-27.
To finish, press STOP
.
You must know the bulletin box s two-digit number (01-50) and four-digit
I
.D. code. (See Creating or Modifying an F-Code box, pages 3.26 3.27, if
necessary.)
Printing a list of F-Code boxes
To store a document in a bulletin box for polling.
The list of F-Code boxes includes:
(1) Each box s identifier number
(2) Box name (if any)
(3) Sub-address
(4) Password
(5) Box type
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 1, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
or
(6) Each box s settings
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box where you want to store the document.
Here, we ve entered 0, 3:
To print a list of your F-Code boxes, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 3, ENTER.
3
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes
The list of documents stored in your machine s F-Code boxes includes:
If you want to use a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the
LCD, enter the box number now.
4
5
(1) Each box s identifier number
(2) Box name (if any)
(3) Box type
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
(4) Each file number (or document number) that is stored
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
To print a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 4,
ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code.
Here, we ve entered 2345:
6
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
3.30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press ENTER.
If you ve entered an incorrect
and returns to standby mode.
If you ve entered the correct
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
7
3
4
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
I.D. code, the display shows:
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box s four-digit I.D. code.
Here we ve entered 2345:
Overwrite Doc. :Off
← →
/ /Enter
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
If you choose:
On: Your bulletin box erases the currently stored document when a new
document is stored in it
Off: Your bulletin box keeps both the currently stored document and the new
document, up to 30 documents in each box.
Press ENTER.
If you ve entered an incorrect
5
6
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
If you ve entered the correct
I.D. code, the display shows:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
8
9
03:F-Code Document
FileNo. :_
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine starts scanning the document
into the selected bulletin box:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you
want to print. Here we ve entered 3.
F-Code Doc. File: 1
A4
Mem 99%
03:F-Code Document
Im p or ta n t: The file number (shown above as 1) tells you how many docu-
ments are in this bulletin box. Your machine numbers files 1-30.
You need to know the file s number to erase or print it.
File No.
:3_
Note: If you want to print all documents stored in the bulletin box, simply
enter 0 (zero).
Press ENTER.
Printing a document stored in a bulletin box
7
Your fax machine prints the chosen document(s), then returns to standby
mode.
You can print a document stored in your machine s F-Code bulletin boxes without
erasing the document from memory.
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
displays the following before returning to standby mode:
To print a stored document:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 3, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
03:Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
1
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to print. We ve entered 03:
2
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
3.31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a document stored in a bulletin box
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
7
8
To erase a stored document:
03:F-Code Document
Check Enter/Stop
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 2, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
1
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any document in the bulletin box,
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
press STOP . The machine will return to standby mode.
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to erase. We ve entered 03:
displays the following and then returns to standby mode:
2
03:F-Code Document
No Document Stored
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Press ENTER to erase the document(s) and to return to standby mode.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
F-Code Document
** Complete **
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
displays the following before returning to step 2:
Using a security box
Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
Printing a document you receive
When your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to an F-Code
security box, your machine prints a message to let you know. The message lists: (1)
the F-Code box number that received the document, (2) the Box name, (3) the
remote machine s TTI (if any), and (4) the file numbers stored in the F-Code box.
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box s four-digit I.D. code.
Here we ve entered 2345:
4
5
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
You then have a certain number of days (see step 17 and 18 on page 3.29) in which
to print out the document before your machine automatically erases it.
Press ENTER.
If you ve entered an incorrect
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
You must know the F-Code security box s two-digit number.
and aborts this operation.
If you ve entered the correct
You must know the F-Code security box s four-digit
I.D. code.
I.D. code, the display shows:
To print a received message:
03:F-Code Document
FileNo. :_
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 3, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
1
2
Select F-Code Box
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you
want to erase. Here we ve entered 3.
6
01:Murata Machinery
03:F-Code Document
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
File No.
:3_
bulletin box that stores the document you want to print. We ve entered 03:
Note: If you want to erase all documents stored in the bulletin box, enter 0
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
(zero).
3.32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing an empty F-Code box
An F-Code box must be empty in order to erase it. (If you select an F-Code box in
these steps which is not empty, the machine beeps. If this happens, print all docu-
ments in that box before erasing it.)
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
Note: If the F-Code security box is not storing any documents, the machine
To erase an empty F-Code box:
briefly displays the following before returning to step 2:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 4, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
03:Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box s four-digit I.D. code.
Here we ve entered 2345:
4
5
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box you want to erase. Here, we ve entered 0, 3 and see:
2
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Press ENTER.
If you want to erase a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the
LCD, enter the box number now.
If you ve entered the correct
ments in the F-Code security box and then erases them.
If you ve entered an incorrect D. code, your fax machine aborts the opera-
tion and returns to standby mode.
I.D. code, your fax machine prints all docu-
3
4
Press ENTER. If the F-Code box is empty, the LCD shows:
I
.
03:Erase F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:****
Using a relay box
Once your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to one of its F-
Code relay boxes, it sends it to the other fax machines that you ve set up on your
relay box. (See Creating or Modifying an F-Code box , pages 3.26 3.27.)
Im p or ta n t: If you select an F-Code box which is not empty, the machine
beeps and, before returning to step 3, briefly displays:
Select F-Code Box
Box In Use
If you set the Auto print mode to on when you created the relay box, your machine
will print the received document, then relay it to the other machine. Otherwise,
your machine will only relay it to the other machines, not print it. See If you chose
Relay, page 3.29 for more details on this setting.
Print any documents received in the F-Code box, then repeat
this procedure from the beginning to erase the box.
Otherwise, select another F-Code box.
Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to another hub
machine s F-Code box and get that machine to relay it to others. See F-Code trans-
mission on pages 3.34 3.35 for more detail.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code.
Here, we ve entered 2345:
5
03:Erase F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:2345
The hub performs a relay broadcast, and the machine which sends the original doc-
ument to the hub has performed a relay broadcast initiation.
3.33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press ENTER.
If you want to toggle between real time transmission and memory transmis-
sion, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.
6
3
4
If you ve entered an incorrect
and returns to standby mode.
If you ve entered the correct
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS three times and then press ENTER.
I.D. code, the display shows:
Enter Sub-Address
_
03:Erase F-Code Box
Check Enter/Cancel
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address in the remote
machine. In this example, we ve entered 123456.
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the F-Code box you ve selected,
5
press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any F-Code box, press STOP
.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER to erase the F-Code box.
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then
7
enter the correct number.
Erase F-Code Box
** Complete **
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
6
Enter Password
_
To erase another F-Code box, repeat steps 2-7.
To finish, press STOP
.
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 8.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we ve
entered 654321.
F-Code transmission and polling
With F-Code, your machine can send secure transmissions, perform relay broadcast
initiations and even poll from other ITU-T-equipped machines, regardless of manu-
facturer.
7
8
Enter Password
654321_
You can do this two ways:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Using the programmable one-touch key (see pages 3.41 3.44)
Entering the ITU-T sub-address and password directly, which is what we ll
describe here.
Enter Fax Number
_
Note: For F-Code communication to work, three things must be true:
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.
9
The remote fax machine must support ITU-T sub-addressing
The remote fax must have a mailbox with an ITU-T sub-address created
on it
What you do now depends on when you want the transmission to begin.
To have it begin now, skip to step 13.
10
You must know the ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for the
remote machine s mailbox
To delay it, go on to step 11.
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
11
12
F-Code transmission
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
Insert the document.
1
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the transmission
should begin, then press ENTER.
2
3.34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press START.
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
13
9
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
If in step 10 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins dialing.
If you chose a delayed command, the machine shows Reserved on the LCD, indicat-
ing that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the polling should
begin, then press ENTER.
10
11
F-Code polling
Press START.
Press F AX to switch the machine to Fax mode.
1
2
If in step 8 you chose an immediate polling, your fax machine begins dialing. If you
chose a delayed command, the machine shows Reserved on the LCD, indicating that
it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.
Press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS four times and then press ENTER.
Enter Sub-Address
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address.
In this example, we ve entered 123456.
3
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then
enter the correct number.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
4
Enter Password
_
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 6.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we ve
entered 654321.
5
Enter Password
654321_
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
6
Enter Fax Number
_
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.
7
What you do now depends upon when you want the polling to begin.
8
To have it begin now, skip to step 11.
To delay it, go on to step 9.
3.35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
List of stored batch documents (page 3.13)
Macros list (page 3.20)
Programmable one-touch keys
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys
Docu m en t stor a ge:
In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-
eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine s
one-touch keys (P 1 and P 2) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key.
Regular polling documents (page 3.15)
F-Code polling documents (pages 3.30 3.31)
You can teach the one-touch keys to carry out any of the following operations:
Com m u n ica tion s fu n ction s:
Delayed transmission (explained on page 3.11)
Broadcasting (page 3.10)
Programming a delayed transmission
To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
Regular polling (pages 3.15 3.16)
F-Code transmission (page 3.34)
F-Code polling (page 3.35)
1
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Batch transmission (pages 3.12 3.14)
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
To teach these keys, you tell the machine four simple things:
How
Wh o
The key you re programming
The number(s) the machine should dial
The operation it should perform
Wh a t
Wh en
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
The date(s) and time(s) when you want it to perform the operation
P r in tou ts:
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Machine settings list (page 4.10)
Fax settings list (page 4.10)
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
Copy settings list (page 4.10)
Activity journal (page 3.22)
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
3
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Delayed commands list (page 2.9)
One-touch list (page 3.3)
Note: If you re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-
mand for this key was a for a delayed operation, and you want to keep
this key programmed for a delayed operation, use these instructions
to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a completely
different operation for batch transmission, then you must first erase
the stored command before programming the new one.
Speed-dial list (page 3.6)
Programmable one-touch list (page 3.49)
Call group directory (page 3.8)
Blocked numbers list (page 3.55)
Sample cover page (page 3.24)
Department time list (page 3.57)
List of F-Code boxes (page 3.30)
List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (page 3.30)
Batch box list (page 3.13)
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3.36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Op tion 2:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
4
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until Communication appears.
Press ENTER, ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for
this programmable one-touch number.
5
6
7
10
11
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Option
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Then skip to step
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
24.
or
If you do want to make additional settings, press
and ENTER.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Resolution :------
← →
/ /Enter
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550629_
Press
until the mode you want appears.
12
13
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
Now, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press
ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
9
Contrast :-------
← →
/ /Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 11/20:30
Press
until the mode you want appears.
14
15
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the memory transmission on or off
when using this programmable one-touch number.
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Memory Tx
← →
:---
/ /Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press
until the mode you want appears.
16
3.37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming a broadcast / group
Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission.
But instead of sending to just one phone number, you set up multiple numbers for
the transmission.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
17
Report
:---
← →
/ /Enter
To program a broadcast / group into a programmable one-touch key:
Press
until the mode you want appears.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
18
19
1
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Cover Page
:---
/ /Enter
← →
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Press
until the mode you want appears.
20
21
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Fax & Copy
:---
/ /Enter
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
← →
Note: When the memory transmission is set to off in step 15, this LCD will
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
not appear and go to step 24.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
Press
until the mode you want appears.
22
23
24
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Press ENTER.
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Note: If you re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-
mand for this key was a for a broadcast/group transmission, and you
want to keep this key programmed for a broadcast/group transmis-
sion, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to
assign this key to a completely different operation for batch transmis-
sion, then you must first erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
3.38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Op tion 2:
Press
until Communication appears.
5
6
7
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
or
Press ENTER, ENTER.
10
11
The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for this programmable
one-touch number.
Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 230 fax numbers you can use any
combination of call groups, one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and manually-
dialed numbers.
Option
:Off
/ /Enter
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
← →
Press BROADCAST to enter a comma between each number or call group.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the la st number.
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Then skip to step
23.
If you do want to make additional settings, press
and ENTER.
To enter a speed-dial number, press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX and the number s
three-digit identifier.
To enter a call group, press GROUP DIAL and the group s identifier number.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
12
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
G5,G7,[01],S006,9-55
Resolution :------
← →
/ /Enter
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Press
until the mode you want appears.
13
14
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to
If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,
press ENTER and skip to step 11.
If you want to delay the broadcast, press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER.
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
8
9
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Contrast :-------
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
15
16
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Report
:---
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
17
3.39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming regular polling
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
18
To program a regular polling operation into a programmable one-touch key:
Cover Page
:---
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
← →
Press
until the mode you want appears.
Select Program No.
19
20
P2:No Number Stored
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Fax & Copy
:---
/ /Enter
← →
Press
until the mode you want appears.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
21
22
23
Press ENTER.
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a polling transmission
and you want to keep this key programmed for a polling transmission,
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-
gramming the new one.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until Communication appears.
5
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
3.40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming an F-Code transmission
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
6
7
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
or
You must know how the remote fax is using each F-Code box to which you re
transmitting for example, as a security box or a relay box. Different fax manu-
facturers may use slightly different terms, but the concepts are the same.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
You must know the remote fax s ITU-T sub-address and password for each box to
which you want to transmit.
To program an F-Code transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550696_
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Next, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press ADVANCED F UNC-
TIONS twice and then press ENTER.
8
9
If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key,
press ENTER and skip to step 12.
If you want to delay the polling, press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
10
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code transmis-
sion and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code
transmission, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want
to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a delayed
transmission, for example), then you first must erase the stored com-
mand before programming the new one.
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER, ENTER.
11
12
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
3.41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until Communication appears.
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the
key, press ENTER and skip to step 15.
If you want to delay the transmission, press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER.
12
13
5
6
7
Type :Communication
← →
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
/ /Enter
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
or
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today. )
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550629_
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time when the fax should perform the command:
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Delayed
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Press ENTER, ENTER.
14
15
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press ADVANCED
F UNCTIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
9
The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for this programmable
one-touch number.
Enter Sub-Address
_
Option
:Off
/ /Enter
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box to which
you want to send the document. Here, we ve entered 123456:
← →
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Skip to step 29.
If you do want to make additional settings, press
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
and ENTER.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
16
17
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
10
Resolution :------
Enter Password
_
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
Note: If there isn t a password for this box, press ENTER, then skip to step 13.
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU-T password for the box.
Here, we ve entered 654321:
11
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Enter Password
654321_
When finished, press ENTER.
3.42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming F-Code polling
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
18
The document which you re polling must exist in the remote fax s F-Code box (ITU-T
standard sub-addressing/password box).
Contrast :-------
← →
/ /Enter
You must know the remote fax s ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for each
box you want to poll.
Press
until the mode you want appears.
19
20
To program an F-Code polling operating into a programmable one-touch key:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the memory transmission on or off
when using this programmable one-touch number.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Memory Tx
← →
:---
/ /Enter
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Press
until the mode you want appears.
21
22
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
Report
:---
← →
/ /Enter
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Press
until the mode you want appears.
23
24
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
Cover Page
:---
/ /Enter
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
← →
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Press
until the mode you want appears.
25
26
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code polling oper-
ation and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code
polling operation, use these instructions to make changes. But if you
want to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a
delayed transmission, for example), then you first must erase the
stored command before programming the new one.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
Fax & Copy
:---
/ /Enter
← →
Note: When the memory transmission is set to off in step 20, this LCD will
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
not appear and go to step 29.
3
4
Press
until the mode you want appears.
27
28
29
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Press ENTER.
Type :Communication
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
← →
/ /Enter
3.43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until Communication appears.
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the
key, press ENTER and skip to step15.
If you want to delay the transmission, press ADVANCED F UNCTIONS, ENTER.
12
13
5
6
7
Type :Communication
← →
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
/ /Enter
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th. )
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
or
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today. )
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550629_
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time when the fax should perform the command:
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Delayed
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Press ENTER, ENTER.
14
15
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press ADVANCED
F UNCTIONS four times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
9
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Enter Sub-Address
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box to which
you want to send the document. Here, we ve entered 123456:
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
10
Enter Password
_
Note: If there isn t a password for this box, press ENTER, then skip to step 14.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU-T password for the box.
Here, we ve entered 654321:
11
Enter Password
654321_
When finished, press ENTER.
3.44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming a batch transmission
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
Press
until Communication appears.
5
6
Type :Communication
← →
The batch box you re using must exist on your fax machine.
/ /Enter
You must know the batch box s identifier number (1 5).
To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
Press ENTER, ADVANCED FUNCTIONS five times and then press ENTER. The LCD
shows:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Batch Tx
Enter Box No. :_
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit identifier for the batch box you
7
8
9
want to assign to this one-touch key. Here, we ve entered 5:
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Batch Tx
Enter Box No. :5
Note: To change an identifier already entered, press CANCEL to erase it.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Then re-enter the correct identifier.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for this
programmable one-touch number.
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Option
:Off
/ /Enter
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
← →
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Skip to step 16.
If you do want to make additional settings, press
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
and ENTER.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a batch transmission
and you want to keep this key programmed for a batch transmission,
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-
gramming the new one.
Resolution :-----
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
10
11
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Contrast :-------
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
12
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
3.45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming printouts
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
13
To program a programmable one-touch key to print a list:
Fax & Copy
:---
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
← →
Press
until the mode you want appears.
Select Program No.
14
15
16
P2:No Number Stored
Press ENTER.
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for printing a list of the
machine settings, you will see:
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Select Program No.
P1:Machine Settings
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Note: If your previous command for this key was for printing a list and you
want to keep this key programmed for printing a list, use these
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a
completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until List Print appears.
5
Type :List Print
← →
/ /Enter
3.46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming a document storage operation
If you want to program a programmable one-touch key to store an F-Code polling
document, two things must be true:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which list you want to program into the program-
mable one-touch:
6
P2:Machine Settings
The F-Code bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.
← →
/ /Enter
You must know the F-Code bulletin box s two-digit number (01-50) and name.
Press
until the list you want appears.
To program your programmable one-touch to store a regular polling document or
F-Code polling document:
7
8
9
Press ENTER.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Note: If P 2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P 1. You can see what you programmed into P 1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P 1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.49.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P 2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Note: If your previous command for this key was to store a document and
you want to keep this key programmed to store a document, use these
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a
completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
← →
/ /Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
3.47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press
until Store Document appears.
The LCD asks if you want to program additional settings for this one-touch.
5
14
15
Type :Store Document
← →
Option
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which storing menu you want to program into the
programmable one-touch:
If you do not want to program additional settings, press ENTER. Go to step 22.
6
If you do want to program additional settings, press
and ENTER, then go on
to step 15.
P2:Polling Document
The LCD asks which resolution you want each time you use this programma-
ble one-touch number.
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
7
8
Resolution :------
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER.
If you select the Polling Document operation, skip to step 14.
If you select the F-Code Document operation, go on to step 9.
Press
until the mode you want appears.
16
17
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing --- tells the machine to
The LCD asks which F-Code bulletin box you want to use.
use its default setting for this programmable one-touch key.
9
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which contrast mode you want each time you use
this programmable one-touch number.
Contrast :-------
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box in which you want to store the document. Here, we ve entered
0, 3:
10
← →
/ /Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
18
19
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the Fax & Copy feature on or off each
time you use this programmable one-touch number.
To select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD, enter
that box number now.
11
12
Fax & Copy
:---
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the box to overwrite (erase) any docu-
ments it is currently storing whenever it stores a new document.
Press
until the mode you want appears.
20
21
22
Overwrite Doc. :Off
Press ENTER.
← →
/ /Enter
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
On: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it will over-
write documents stored in it.
Off: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it won t erase
(overwrite) any documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30
documents in each box (each document can include one or more pages).
Press
until the mode you want appears.
13
Then press ENTER to save the setting.
3.48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Fax dialing with programmable one-touch
Erasing a programmable one-touch key
To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, A, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the first programmable
one-touch number that has been programmed:
1
Set your document in the ADF or on the FBS glass.
1
2
3
Select Program No.
P1:Delayed
Make any necessary adjustments as usual.
If you are using the FBS glass, set the document size by pressing DOCUMENT
SIZE before you press the programmable one-touch key.
Note: If P 2 appears, it means P 1 is empty.
Press the programmable one-touch key you want to erase. Here, we ve
selected P 2:
2
Press the programmable one-touch key in which you ve stored the fax commu-
nication command.
4
Select Program No.
P2:Polling
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.
Note: To review the details of each operation, review the instructions for that
operation. See page 3.36 for a list of each operation and where to find it.
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:
To erase a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears
on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
** Reserved **
Jan 29 2000 17:17
P2:Erase P One-Touch
Check Enter/Cancel
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,
the LCD shows the number:
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the programmable one-
touch key you ve selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to
step 2.
9-1-972-555-4335
A4 Normal
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase P One-Touch
** Complete **
To erase another programmable one-touch key, repeat steps 2 5. Or press STOP to
return to standby mode.
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys
You fax machine can print a list of the commands you ve stored in your programma-
ble one-touch keys.
The list includes:
(1) each key s one-touch number
(2) the fax/telephone number
(3) when the command should start
(4) which command you ve selected
(5) if applicable, the selected call group(s) or F-Code box(es) you ve stored in
the key
(6) the individual settings for each key
To print a list of programmable one-touch keys, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 8,
ENTER.
3.49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Security features
Your machine has a number of security features to keep your private fax documents
private, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unautho-
rized use of your machine.
Security reception
Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not
print them). Then you can print them out later, at your convenience. For example,
you could use this if you re concerned about workers reading documents intended
for your eyes only.
These security features include:
(1) Security reception, (2) PIN mask, (3) Block junk fax, and (4) Department codes.
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
tion as described on left column. You must also know the passcode.
The passcode
Note: In the following instructions, your machine s LCD shortens the word
Your machine has a passcode protection system which must be turned on in order to
Transmission to Tx and the word Receive to Rx.
use the security features listed below:
• Security reception
• PIN mask
• Department code protection
To set your machine s passcode:
Activating security reception
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Security Rx
Enter Passcode :****
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001 9999) you want to use. Write it down,
and put it in a safe place.
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the protection passcode.
Here, we ve entered 6296:
2
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000. This turns off passcode protection.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Security Rx
2
Enter Passcode :6296
Protect Passcode
Old Passcode :****
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
If you are creating a passcode, use the numeric keypad to enter 0000.
If you are changing an existing passcode, enter the existing passcode.
Security Rx :Off
3
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER.
4
5
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
4
5
Here, we ve chosen On .
Enter the new four-digit passcode. Here, we ve entered 6296:
Security Rx :On
Protect Passcode
New Passcode :6296
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the machine s current clock setting:
Press ENTER to save the passcode.
6
Security Rx
Enter Time: 15:42
Note: Any time you want to turn off the passcode, change the passcode back to
0000 by repeating steps 2 6 and entering 0000 in step 5.
3.50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Printing from security reception / Turning off security reception
When security reception is on, an incoming fax goes directly into your machine s
memory and the MEMORY RECEIVE light comes on. But the incoming fax message is
not printed.
If you want security reception to begin now (and at this same time every day),
skip to step 8.
Otherwise, go on to step 7.
6
7
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (use a 24-hour format) when secu-
rity reception should begin every day. Type over the numbers displayed.
Here, we ve entered 17:35:
To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your
machine to normal reception until the next time):
Press P r ogr a m k ey, D, 3, 0, 4, ENTER
If you using the Soft key, press the Soft key instead of this operation.
In which way, the LCD shows:
Security Rx
Enter Time: 17:35
1
To change a digit, press
the correct digit.
to move to the left, or
to move right. Then enter
Security Rx Doc.
Enter Passcode :****
Press ENTER to save the setting.
8
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here we ve entered 6296:
2
Help fu l tip : After setting for activating the security reception, you can assign the
security reception to the Soft key (see page 3.17) to turn it on and off.
Turning on the security reception by pressing a Soft key is not
effected the time setting you entered at step 7. It begins the security
reception immediately.
Security Rx Doc.
Enter Passcode :6296
Press ENTER.
3
If you ve entered the correct passcode, your fax machine will print all docu-
ments in its memory and then erase them. Then it will turn security
reception off until the next time you ve scheduled security reception or the
Soft key which programmed security reception is pressed.
To turn the security reception on by pressing a soft key:
Program a Soft key for security reception. (See page 3.17.)
1
2
If you using the Soft key, the LED light of the Soft key will be off.
Press a Soft key that is assigned for security reception.
If you ve entered an incorrect passcode, your fax machine will refuse to
print, and security reception remains on.
Enter Passcode :****
Enter the protection passcode and then press ENTER.
The LCD briefly shows following and the LED of the Soft key will light and the
security reception begins immediately.
3
** Sec. Rx Active **
Note: To turn the security reception off, see Printing from security
reception/ Turning off security reception, next column.
3.51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Masking the PIN
Press
Mode1.
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen
4
5
To prevent unauthorized long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require
you to enter a personal identification number (PIN) whenever you dial long distance.
PIN Mode
← →
:Mode1
/ /Enter
Your fax s PIN mask feature helps you keep that PIN number private. With the PIN
mask activated, you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in
a journal, error message printout, delayed command list or a TCR. The PIN may be up
to eight characters in length. It also can include the * or # symbols, and it can be
entered from the numeric keypad.
Press ENTER.
Autodialing while using the PIN mask
There are three possible settings for the PIN mask:
Note: The following instructions presume you understand how to set and use your
Off Turns off the PIN mask feature. Any PIN you enter will appear on any dis-
play or printout which shows the number you dial.
machine s autodialer. If you need to review, see pages 3.1 3.9.
If you chose Mode 1 t h e PIN goes in
Mode 1 E a ch remote fax unit has a departmental PIN access code.
Mode 2 E a ch fax user has a departmental PIN access code.
In Mode 1, before autodialing a number for the first time, you must add the PIN to
the stored one-touch key or speed-dial number. Here s how:
Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you
must store the remote unit s PIN access code within that number. However, if
you select Mode 2, this isn t necessary. (See Autodialing while using the PIN
mask, next column for further details.)
Begin by creating or changing an entry in the autodialer. See pages 3.1 3.9 if
1
necessary. While you re setting this up, the machine asks you to enter the PIN.
The LCD shows:
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission
(see pages 3.12 3.14), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit
within the appropriate batch box.
Set PIN Number
Enter Passcode :****
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we ll use our
sample passcode again.
2
Activating the PIN mask
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
Set PIN Number
tion as described on page 3.50. You must also know the passcode.
Enter Passcode :6296
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Press ENTER. In our example, we re setting speed-dial number 001:
3
PINMode
Enter Passcode :****
001:PIN Number
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we ve entered
6296.
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired PIN, up to eight characters in
length.
4
PINMode
Enter Passcode :6296
001:PIN Number
1057_
Note: If you enter an invalid passcode, the machine s security feature rejects
Press ENTER to save the PIN.
the attempt and returns to standby mode.
5
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,
indicates Invalid Number on the LCD and then returns to step 4.
Now you may autodial the number as usual.
Press ENTER.
3
PIN Mode
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
3.52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Im p or ta n t: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialer numbers you use must include
the PIN. This also applies to autodialer numbers used with batch
transmission (see page 3.12) or programmable one-touch keys (see
pages 3.36 3.49).
If you ve specified Mode 2 the machine guides you
Enter the phone number as usual.
1
Press Start
19725550911_
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission,
you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the appropri-
ate batch box.
Press START. The LCD shows:
2
Enter PIN Number
_
If you chose Mode 2 a s you a utodia l, load the code
In this mode, you don t have to add the PIN to the autodialer setting. Instead, you
enter the PIN manually each time you autodial:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.
3
Enter PIN Number
123456_
Dial the number as you normally would, using the autodialer. Here, we ve
pushed one-touch key A. The machine now asks for the PIN:
1
Press START. Your machine dials the number.
Enter PIN Number
_
4
Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.
2
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use
both your machine s autodialer and its batch transmission feature. If you
need to review, see pages 3.1 3.9 for more on the autodialer and/or page 3.12
for more on batch transmission.
Enter PIN Number
1057_
Press START. Your machine dials the number.
3
If you ve specified Mode 1 or Mode 2
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission
(see page 3.12), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit
within the appropriate batch box.
Im p or ta n t: Any autodialer number you use with batch transmission must include
the PIN. (To review how to include this information in an autodialer
number, review the Mode 1 instructions under Autodialing while
using the PIN mask, page 3.52.)
Before sending a batch transmission the first time, you must store the PIN within its
batch box. Here s how:
Dialing from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask
If you ve specified Mode 1 use sta r power
Follow the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages 3.12 3.13).
The LCD asks for the fax number (here, we re working with batch box 1):
Enter the phone number, then press the * ( star ) key and enter the PIN.
The PIN always goes last. For example, to dial 19725550911 with a PIN of
123456 , enter 19725550911*123456:
1
1
1:Fax Number
_
Press Start
19725550911*123456_
Enter an autodialer number, or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-
ber, to which the batch transmission should go.
2
Press START. The PIN disappears from the display, and your machine dials the
desired phone number.
2
Im p or ta n t: If you re entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the
fax number, followed by the * ( star ) key and then the PIN.
3.53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Setting Block Junk Fax
Your fax machine s Block J unk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unautho-
rized incoming faxes ( junk fax ). But before you block junk fax, first understand
how this feature works, to determine if it s right for you. There are four possible set-
tings for Block Junk Fax:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,
indicates No PIN Number on the LCD and then returns you to step 2.
Continue with the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages
3.12 3.13).
Off The feature isn t activated.
Mode1
Your fax machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone
Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.
number in your autodialer matches the last four digits of the remote fax s sub-
scriber ID (the phone number part of the TTI). If it doesn t find a match, your
machine disconnects the call.
Mode2
This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight digits
match any number in the blocked numbers list (explained later). Your machine
can hold up to 50 blocked numbers.
Mode3
This rejects numbers that are not in the autodialer and also rejects num-
bers that are in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on your
autodialer for transmission to it, while still blocking its incoming calls by putting
it in the blocked numbers list.
But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature, please consider:
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs.
With Block Junk Fax activated, your machine would reject faxes from these
machines.
Access codes can cause confusion. If an autodialer entry ends with extra codes,
such as long-distance codes, Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those faxes.
To set Block Junk Fax:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax s current set-
ting:
1
Block Junk Fax:Off
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Here, we ve chosen Mode2.
Block Junk Fax:Mode2
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
What you do next depends on what you selected in step 1:
If you selected Off or Mode1, press STOP to return to standby mode.
If you selected either Mode2 or Mode3, go on to step 4.
3.54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Clearing a number from the blocked numbers list
To clear a number from the list:
Depending on if you have already entered at least one number into the
blocked numbers list, the LCD shows one of the following:
4
5
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 0, ENTER.
If your Block Junk Fax setting is either Mode2 or Mode3, skip to step 3.
Enter Fax Number
01:_
Select BlockJunk No.
01:555-2971
1
or
Block Junk Fax:Off
If you want to modify an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press
or until you see the number you want to modify.
o r
If you want to enter a new number in an already-started blocked numbers
list, press or until you find an empty position in the list.
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until you see your preference, Mode2 or Mode3.
2
3
Block Junk Fax:Mode2
← →
/ /Enter
Then press ENTER to enter or modify the blocked number.
Note: To clear a number from the list, see Clearing a number from the
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
blocked numbers list, right column.
Select BlockJunk No.
01:555-2971
Use the numeric keypad to enter the last eight characters of a fax number you
want to block. For example, if you want to block a fax from someone with a
Subscriber ID of 972-555-3038, you should enter 5, 5, 5, DIALING OP TIONS, 3, 0,
3, 8:
6
Press
or
until you see the number you want to clear.
4
5
Press CANCEL to clear the number.
To clear another number from the blocked numbers list, repeat steps 4 5.
Otherwise, go on to step 6.
Enter Fax Number
01:555-3038_
To change a specific digit, press
cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct
number.
to move left or
to move right until the
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
6
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the next slot in the blocked
numbers list.
If you do not want to enter or change a number for this slot, go on to step 8.
If you do want to enter or change a number for this slot, repeat steps 5 7.
Printing a list of the blocked numbers
Forgot which number is stored in the blocked number list? Just print a list of the
blocked numbers.
7
8
To print a list of the blocked numbers, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 0, ENTER.
Press STOP. Your machine will return to standby mode.
3.55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Clearing a department code
Using department codes
You can keep track of how your machine is used through its department code feature.
When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to
enter the department code before sending or polling a document. The Activity
Journal then keeps track of fax transactions by department.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Department No
001:1555
After you turn on this setting, assign specific code numbers to your office s fax users
and tell them to enter these department codes before sending faxes.
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next page), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
Note: Please note that using this setting may block access to the fax machine.
Press
3111 .
or
until you see the code you want to clear. Here, we ve selected
2
3
Entering a department code
Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.
Select Department No
005:3111
To enter a department code:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. Depending upon whether you ve
already entered a department code, the LCD shows:
1
Press CANCEL. The LCD shows:
3111:Erase Dpt. Code
Check Enter/Cancel
Enter Dept. Code
001:_
Select Department No
001:1555
or
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the department code you ve
Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 3.57), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
selected, press CANCEL. The machine will return to step 2.
Press ENTER. The code you selected will be cleared.
To clear another department code, repeat steps 2 3.
If you don t want to clear another department code, press STOP to return to
standby mode.
4
If you have not entered any codes in your fax, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, go on to step 3.
2
3
To enter a new code in a department code list that s already been started,
press ENTER. The fax will skip to the next empty position in the list.
Turning the department code setting on and off
Note: If you want to modify an existing entry in the department code, you
first clear a department code you want to modify and then enter a
new code (see Clearing a department code, right column).
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 3, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Dept. Setting :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit department code, 0000 9999.
4
5
Here, we ve entered 1555:
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next page), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
Enter Dept. Code
001:1555
Im p or ta n t: To turn the department code setting on, at least one depart-
To change one digit, press
is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.
to move left or
to move right until the cursor
ment code must be existed in your machine.
Press
or
until you see the setting you want.
2
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.
To enter another department code, repeat steps 4 5.
To stop entering department codes, press STOP to return to standby mode.
Dept. Setting :On
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER.
3.56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Turning department code protection on and off
Press START.
4
5
Im p or ta n t: This feature will work only if you ve activated the passcode protection
Enter Dept. Code
_
(see page 3.50).
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate four-digit department code.
In this example, we ve entered 3111:
Set Dept. Protect
Enter Passcode: ****
Enter Dept. Code
3111_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode:
2
Set Dept. Protect
Enter Passcode: 6296
Press START again.
6
Printing the department time list
To change one digit, press
is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.
to move left or
to move right until the cursor
To print the list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 1, 2, ENTER.
Press ENTER.
3
4
5
Note: If department code operation is protected (see left column), the fax beeps
briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the pro-
tection first, then repeat the above.
The department time list includes the following information for each department
code:
Dept. Protect :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
Time period covered by the department time list
Dept. Protect :On
← →
/ /Enter
Each department code
Total communication time (in hours, minutes and seconds; HH:MM:SS) Cou n t s
the communication time up to 999:59:59 (999 hours:59 minutes:59 seconds). If the
fax exceeds the maximum time, it does not count further.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Sending a fax using a department code
Total printed pages Counts the pages up to 65535 pages. If the fax exceeds the
maximum number of pages, it counts the total pages from 0 (zero).
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.
You must know the department code.
Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see Clearing
the current department time list , below.
Insert the document.
Clearing the department time list
To clear the current total counts of each department code:
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, C, 3, 0, 4, ENTER, ENTER.
Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad.
The total communication time and total printed pages for each department code are
cleared. The department code will not be erased.
If you enter the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 5.
Otherwise, go on to step 4.
3.57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the
default settings
This chapter describes
how to change the settings of your
machine.
Settings for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Settings for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Settings for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Settings for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Settings for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Printer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for transmission
By following the steps above, you ve set your defaults for scanning. Before sending
documents, you can override these default scan settings for that transmission.
Scan settings
Defa u lt settin g: Primary resolution: Normal, Primary contrast: Normal
To override the default resolution and contrast settings before sending a document:
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.
Two different settings tell your machine how to scan documents. The initial factory
settings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing
any of these settings:
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
Once your document is transmitted, your machine returns to its default settings.
P r im a r y r esolu tion m od e Sets the resolution for your documents. Choose
either normal, fine, superfine ( S Fin e on the LCD) or grayscale mode ( Gray ).
P r im a r y con tr a st m od e Sets how light or dark you want faxed documents
to be when they arrive at their destinations.
Setting ECM
Defa u lt settin g: ON.
Note: The primary settings you choose effect your fax activity only.
To set these modes:
Line noise, or static on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data
from one fax machine to another.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a resolution:
1
That s why your fax machine gives you the option of using Error Correction Mode
(ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the sending
machine automatically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine can t
verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.
Resolution :Normal
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen
2
Note: ECM gives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad
phone line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse
the line is, the slower the transmission. That s why the machine lets you
turn ECM on or off as needed.
fine resolution.
Resolution :Fine
← →
/ /Enter
Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If you ve activated ECM and then transmit to
a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax
transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a contrast setting:
3
4
Contrast :Normal
← →
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows the current ECM set-
ting:
1
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen
light contrast.
ECMMode :On
← →
/ /Enter
Contrast :Light
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
In this example, we ve chosen Off.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
E C M Mode
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Memory transmission
Defa u lt settin g: ON.
TTI transmission
Defa u lt settin g: ON.
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of text
at the very top of the page. This text lists a name, called the Transmit Terminal
Identifier (TTI), and a fax number. You can set the machine to not send the TTI.
Note: When the machine s memory is full, it can transmit only through the docu-
ment feeder (real time transmission).
Note: When you use the FBS glass, the machine always uses memory transmission
even if you set the memory transmission to off.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
To change the default setting of memory transmission:
TTI Tx
:On
/ /Enter
← →
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 6, ENTER.
1
Press
or
until the setting you want appears. In this example, we ve
Memory Tx
:On
2
3
chosen Off.
← →
/ /Enter
TTI Tx
:Off
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
← →
2
3
In this example, we ve chosen Off.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Memory Tx
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light glows, memory transmission is on.
If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light doesn t glow, memory transmission is off.
Quick Memory transmission
Defa u lt settin g: ON.
Im p or ta n t: Your fax machine s memory transmission feature must be turned on
to use Quick Memory transmission (see above).
To change the default setting of Quick Memory transmission:
Press P r ogr am key, B, 2, 0, 7, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Quick Tx :On
/ /Enter
← →
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Here, we ve chosen Off.
Quick Tx
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for reception
Reduction margin
Your machine s reduction margin is measured in millimeters (mm). We ll define
reduction margin by explaining how it s used:
Print settings
You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:
Print reduction rate
When a fax message enters your machine s electronic brain, the machine measures
the message s length and compares it to (a ) the length of your selected paper (not
include the print margins) p lu s (b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of
the incoming message is shorter than (a ) and (b) put together, your machine prints
the message on just one sheet.
Reduction margin
Paper save function
You set all three in the same procedure, discussed on next page. Following is a
explanation for each:
If it s longer, your machine prints the message on more than one sheet.
Print reduction rate
Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documents to a
size that fits the paper in your machine. (This setting doesn t affect copies you may
make with your machine.)
Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 40mm will
print most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and
then, only if you have problems with it, select different settings.
Half-page reception
Half-page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half-
page, memo-sized messages. When activated, this feature tells the machine to
combine two of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page reception
only combines half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same transmission.
It won t combine two half-page faxes from separate transmissions.
Below are the options for both the print reduction and copy reduction settings:
Settin g
Au to
Wh a t it d oes
Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a
minimum of 50%. Tries to reduce printout to fit on one sheet of
your selected paper size. If it can t, print the image at 100% size
on two or more pages.
To adjust the print settings
Defa u lt settin g: Rx reduction rate: Auto, Reduction margin: 40 mm,
Half-page reception: OFF.
Does not reduce document. (Due to the sender s TTI, this may print
two pages when receiving a one-page fax document. See 97%,below.)
100%
97%
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the current print
reduction rate:
1
Reduces an original so that the final printout of a one-page-
document (if the original isn t larger than the paper in your
machine) will only be one page long, even with the TTI.
Rx Reduc.Rate :Auto
← →
/ /Enter
91%
81%
Reduces documents slightly more.
Press
or
until the reduction setting you want appears.
In this example, we ve chosen 91%.
Reduces documents even more. Helpful for some international
stationery sizes, as well as special applications.
2
Turns legal-sized originals into letter-sized printed copies.
Rx Reduc.Rate :91%
75%
← →
/ /Enter
4.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Image Rotation
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current reduction margin:
3
4
Defa u lt settin g: OFF.
Margin
(00-85mm):40
Note: This feature is available only for the MFX-1600 model.
When this feature is activated, incoming fax messages will be rotated automatically
to fit on the paper.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin you want. If
necessary, press
or
to move the cursor. In this example, we ve chosen
8.5"
38mm.
Your
Fax
Machine
Margin
11"
(00-85mm):38
11"
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for
half-page reception:
5
6
7
8.5"
A
Half Page Recpt.:Off
← →
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 1, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
2
Press
or
until the setting you want appears. In this example, we ve cho-
Rotate Rx
:Off
/ /Enter
sen On.
← →
Half Page Recpt.:On
← →
Press
or
until the setting you want appears. In this example, we ve cho-
/ /Enter
sen On.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Rotate Rx
← →
:On
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Setting the number of rings
Defa u lt settin g: 2 time.
3
You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call.
Choose from 1 to 9 rings.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
# Of Rings
#
(1-9):2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of rings you want, from 1 to 9.
Here, we ve chosen 4 rings.
2
# Of Rings
#
(1-9):4
Note: If you enter the number except 1-9, the machine will beep briefly to
warn you that it can t accept that setting.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for dialing
Changing the dialing pause length
Defa u lt settin g: 2 seconds.
Changing redial settings
Defa u lt settin g: Number of redial: 2 times, Redial interval: 1 minute.
It s up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits
between redials (that length of time between calls is the redial interval).
To program the redial settings:
The pause is set by the factory to last two seconds, but you can set it to last as long
as ten seconds if necessary. To change the pause length:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 5, ENTER.
1
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 2, 0, 4, ENTER.
1
Dialing Pause
Time (02-10):02
# Of Redials
#
(02-15):02
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want for the dialing pause.
Here, we ve chosen nine seconds.
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of redials you want. Choose
from 2 to 15 redials. In this example, we ve entered 03.
2
Dialing Pause
Time (02-10):09
# Of Redials
#
(02-15):03
Note: The length setting requires two digits. Always enter a leading zero for
Note: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.
lengths less than 10 seconds.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
The LCD now shows:
Redial Interval
Interval (1-5):1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want between redial
attempts. Choose from 1 to 5 minutes. In this example, we ve chosen 4.
5
6
Redial Interval
Interval (1-5):4
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for copying
By following the steps above, you ve set your defaults for scanning. Before copying
documents, you can override these default scan settings for that copying.
Copy scan settings
Defa u lt settin g: Primary document type: Text, Primary contrast: Normal
To override the default document type and contrast settings before copying a docu-
Two different settings tell your machine how to scan documents. The initial factory
settings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing
any of these settings:
ment:
Press DOCUMENT to change the document type.
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
P r im a r y d ocu m en t typ e Sets the document type for your documents.
Choose either Text, Text&Photo, or Photo.
Once your document is copied, your machine returns to its default settings.
P r im a r y con tr a st Sets how light or dark you want copied documents to be.
Note: These primary settings you choose effect your copy activity only.
To set these modes:
Adjusting the copy print settings
Defa u lt settin g: Margin: 24 mm
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a resolution:
Your machine s print margin for copying is measured in millimeters (mm). We ll
define print margin by explaining how it s used:
1
Doc. Type:Text
When an original document is scanned, the machine measures the document s
length and compares it to (a ) the length of your selected paper (not include the
print margins) p lu s (b) the print margin you set. If the length of the document is
longer than (a ) and (b) put together, your machine prints the document on more
than one sheet.
← →
/ /Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen
2
PHOTO.
Doc. Type:Photo
← →
Note: A print margin setting of 24 mm will print most documents as single pages.
Try this combination first and then, only if you have problems with it, select
different settings.
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a contrast setting:
3
4
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the current print mar-
gin for copying:
1
Contrast :Normal
← →
/ /Enter
Margin
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen
(00-85mm):24
light contrast.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the print margin you want. If necessary,
2
Contrast :Light
← →
press
or
to move the cursor. In this example, we ve chosen 20mm.
/ /Enter
Margin
(00-85mm):20
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Changing the copy auto reset time
Defa u lt settin g: 3 minutes.
Setting Negative/Positive
Defa u lt settin g: Off
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after a certain period of
time. You can change this time from 1 to 10 minutes.
If you frequently use the Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas), you
can set it to on for default setting by following procedure.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 3, ENTER.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 7, ENTER.
1
1
Auto Reset Time
(01-10):03
Nega/Posi
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time you want for the copy auto reset.
Here, we ve chosen ten minutes.
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
2
3
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Auto Reset Time
(01-10):10
Nega/Posi
:On
/ /Enter
← →
Note: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine returns to the standby mode
with following display:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Copy <Nega/Posi> 1
Ltr [ Ltr ] 100%
Setting copy auto
Defa u lt settin g: Auto is set for Recording paper size
Setting combine
The machine automatically selects the recording paper size according to the docu-
ment size and enlargement/reduction rate. You can change it to select the document
size or enlargement/reduction rate automatically, instead of the recording paper
size.
Defa u lt settin g: Off
Note: This feature is available only for the MFX-1600 model.
If you frequently use the combine feature, you can set it to on for default setting by
following procedure.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 4, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select the item
you want to set to Auto:
1
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 3, 0, 8, ENTER.
1
Copy Auto:Paper Size
← →
/ /Enter
Combine
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Press
or
until the item you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen
2
3
Document size.
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
3
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Copy Auto:Doc. Size
← →
/ /Enter
Combine
:On
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine return to the standby mode
with following display:
Copy <Combine>
Ltr [ Ltr ] 100%
1
4.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for operation
Setting the silent mode
Defa u lt settin g: OFF.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the alarm turned
on or off:
5
Silent mode allows you to mute the ringer, the alarm and the key tones.
Alarm Silent :Off
← →
/ /Enter
Rin ger If you turn the ringer off in silent mode, a ring alerts you when you
receive fax or voice call and a call request.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
6
7
Ala r m If you disable the alarm in silent mode, the sound your machine
makes when an error occurs and the beep your machine makes after sending or
receiving a fax or making a copy cannot be heard.
If you want to turn off the alarm, select On and the machine will be quiet.
Otherwise, the machine will beep.
Key ton e If you mute the key tone, your machine will not make a sound when
you press the buttons on the control panel.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the key tones on
or off:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax s current set-
ting:
KeyBuzzer Silent:Off
1
← →
/ /Enter
Silent Mode :Off
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
8
9
← →
/ /Enter
If you want to turn off the tones, select On and the machine will be quiet.
Otherwise, the machine will beep when the keys are pressed.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Silent Mode :On
If you turned off the alarm or the key tones in the steps above, your machine
gives you the option of setting the volume for the alarm and key tones. If this
option appears, skip to step 10.
← →
/ /Enter
Note: If you chose On, the silent mode of Ringer, Alarm or Key tone can be
set to be available. If you chose Off, the machine will ring and beep as
usual.
If you didn t turn any of these off, your fax machine returns to standby mode.
The LCD shows your fax s current setting:
10
11
If you chose Off, skip to step 10.
Alarm&Key Volume:Mid
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the ringer to be
on or off:
← →
/ /Enter
3
4
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Ringer Silent :Off
Below are the possible settings:
← →
/ /Enter
Alarm&Key Volume:Max
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
= Loudest setting.
= Medium setting.
← →
/ /Enter
If you want to turn off the ringer, select On and the machine will be quiet.
Otherwise, the machine will ring.
Alarm&Key Volume:Mid
← →
/ /Enter
4.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Primary mode
Defa u lt settin g: None.
Alarm&Key Volume:Min
← →
= Low setting.
/ /Enter
You can set the primary standby mode in this operation. After finishing any jobs,
your machine will return to the mode you set here immediately.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
12
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 7, ENTER.
1
Setting Sleep mode (Energy saving mode)
Primary Mode :None
Defa u lt settin g: 30 minutes.
← →
/ /Enter
Your machine is initially set to be in the Sleep mode automatically when 30 minutes
has passed after you pressed any key last.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
In this example, we ve chosen Copy.
Note: All LED lamps on the control panel will not be off, even when the machine is
in the Printer sleep mode.
If you want to change the time or to set the Sleep mode to OFF, you can set it here.
Primary Mode :Copy
← →
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 5, ENTER.
1
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Sleep Mode
:On
← →
/ /Enter
Setting 2-bin tray (Option)
Defa u lt settin g: Copy exit: Lower tray, Fax exit: Upper tray, List exit: Upper tray,
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
4
In this example, we ve chosen On.
PC-Fax exit: Upper tray
You will set where to exit the printed paper in this operation.
Sleep Mode
:On
/ /Enter
← →
Note: This operation will appear only when your machine has the optional 2-bin
tray unit.
If you chose On, proceed to step 3.
If you chose Off, skip to step 4
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 1, 0, 9, ENTER.
1
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks you to enter the time for the
Sleep mode using numeric keypad (1 - 120 min.).
2-Bin Tray
:Off
/ /Enter
← →
Sleep Mode Timing
(001-120):030
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we ve chosen On.
Note: Your machine will be in the Sleep mode when the time you set has
2-Bin Tray
:On
/ /Enter
passed after you pressed any key last.
← →
Press ENTER to save the setting.
If you chose On, proceed to step 3.
If you chose Off, skip to step 7.
4.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Printing your settings
After you ve programmed settings into your machine, print a settings list. We
recommend this, particularly if you re sharing the machine with other users, who
might change the settings.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for copy exit.
3
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
In this example, we ve chosen Upper.
Copy exit
:Upper
← →
/ /Enter
With this list, you can quickly confirm that all of your settings are correct, without
having to go back and check them on the machine. Or, if you do need to undo
someone else s changes, this list guides you in returning the machine to your
preferred settings.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD now asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for fax reception.
4
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
Settings are divided into three; Machine Settings, Fax Settings and Copy Settings.
In this example, we ve chosen Lower.
To print the Machine settings list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 1, ENTER.
The LCD will show the following as the list prints:
Fax exit
:Lower
← →
/ /Enter
Machine Settings
** Printing **
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD now asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for list printing.
5
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
To print the Fax settings list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 2, ENTER.
The LCD will show the following as the list prints:
In this example, we ve chosen Lower.
List exit
:Lower
← →
/ /Enter
Fax Settings
** Printing **
If your machine has the optional RS-232C interface kit, proceed to step 6.
Otherwise, skip to step 7.
To print the Copy settings list, press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 1, 0, 3, ENTER.
The LCD will show the following as the list prints:
The LCD now asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for PC printing.
6
7
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
Copy Settings
** Printing **
In this example, we ve chosen Lower.
PC-FAX exit :Lower
Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any
← →
/ /Enter
settings you don t recognize or understand.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Printing a program list
Your machine can also print a program list. This lists the functions available on your
fax machine and the keystrokes needed to complete them. (See also Function Table,
pages 1.14 1.17.)
To print a program list, press P r ogr a m k ey, *, 8.
4.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Printer options
Note: These options appear only if the optional printer controller has been installed.
Print the Demo Page
Print NIC status
The demo page provides a demonstration that highlights the features and functions
of the printer.
Note: To access this function, the optional NIC (Network Interface Card) is
required.
To print the demo page:
To print the NIC status:
Press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 2, 0, 1.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 2, 0, 4.
1
1
01 Demo Page
04 NIC Status
← →
/ /Enter
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to print the demo page.
Press ENTER to print the NIC status.
2
2
Print the Printer Configuration Page
The printer configuration page provides all the status and configuration of the
printer.
Set TCP/IP Address
Note: To access this function, the optional NIC (Network Interface Card) is
required.
To print the printer configuration page:
When you using the TCP/IP protocol, enter an IP Address, Subnet mask and default
Getaway.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 2, 0, 2.
1
To print the PCL font list:
02 Status Page
← →
/ /Enter
Press P r ogr a m k ey, B, 4, 0, 1.
1
Press ENTER to print the printer configuration page.
01 TCP/IP
2
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:
Print PCL Font List
2
3
Set IP Address
000.000.000.000
The PCL font list provides a list of all PCL fonts currently installed in the printer.
To print the PCL font list:
Enter the IP Address for your printer using the numeric keypad, then press
ENTER to save the setting.
For example, your printer s IP Address is 200.1.37.47, you should press
2 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 7 0 4 7.
Press P r ogr a m k ey, E, 2, 0, 3.
1
03 Font List
← →
/ /Enter
Press ENTER to print the PCL font list.
2
4.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:
4
Set Subnet Mask
000.000.000.000
Enter Subnet Mask address.
5
6
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:
Set Default Gateway
000.000.000.000
Enter default Gateway.
7
8
9
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine will return to standby mode.
To effect the TCP/IP setting, turn the machine off and then turn on.
4.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
This page intentionally blank.
4.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Tips on caring for your machine
What to do if problems occur
Glossary
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Clearing paper jams
To remove the document:
If an original document jams
If an original document jams in the ADF while scanning the document into the
memory for faxing or copying, the LCD will show:
Open the scanner cover.
1
1
Document Jam
ContStor Enter/Cancl
If you do wish to continue the operation, press ENTER and proceed to step 2.
To abort the operation, press CANCEL. This will erase from memory all pages
stored during this operation, and the machine will return to standby mode.
Im p or ta n t: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the
machine will erase from memory all pages stored during this
operation and the machine will return to the standby mode.
Lift the original document from the
machine.
2
Note: If the document jammed in the following case, the following message
will appear and the machine will abort the operation anyway; instead,
you ll have to perform the job again from scratch.
Note: If you cannot remove the origi-
nal document, open the inner
cover as shown at right, then
remove the document.
The first page of the document jammed
During the real time transmission or quick memory transmission
During non-sorting ADF job
Open&Close ScanCover
Reset Document
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped down
securely.
Also, the Repeat transmission. Error on scan at page xx message
will be printed out if the document jammed during transmission.
3
Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn, do not re-send
The LCD will show which page (i. e., which page number) is jammed. To con-
tinue scanning from the jammed page forward (keeping in mind the Note at
the end of step 1, above), press START after clearing the jam.
2
it.
p 2. Reset Document
Press Start Key
Note: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the
machine will begin to send or copy the document(s) it has.
If you wish to cancel this operation, press STOP . The machine will delete all
pages from memory and then return to its standby mode.
5.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
If a printout jams inside your machine
Remove the jammed paper.
4
To clear a printout jammed inside your machine:
Im p or ta n t: The fuser unit becomes
very hot.
Im p or ta n t: Be careful not to put your hand between the top cover and the
Do n ot touch the fuser
unit when you are remov-
ing a paper jam.
machine.
Open the top cover.
Note: Avoid getting unfixed toner on
1
your hands and clothes.
Open the side cover.
Pulling up the jam release lever to
remove the jammed paper.
Open the printer cover.
2
Reset the toner and drum cartridge.
5
Remove the toner and drum cartridge.
3
Im p or ta n t: Shield the drum cartridge
from light, especially
strong light. Later, if you
have to remove the car-
tridge from the fax,
immediately wrap it in a
thick cloth to protect it
from light.
Gently close the printer
cover, pressing firmly on
the both sides of the
printer cover until you
hear it click.
6
7
Gently close the top cover,
pressing firmly on the both
sides of the top cover until
you hear it click.
5.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Print quality problems
If your machine s printouts develop quality problems, try to find the example below
that matches your printout problem. When you find one which is like yours, try the
suggested solutions. If they don t work, contact your authorized Muratec dealer.
Printouts are too dark
The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Pages are blank
The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be
installed correctly.
Install each cartridge correctly.
The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may
be very low.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Printouts have a blurred background
The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Pages are black
The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Your fax machine s printer may be due for a service check.
Call your dealer.
Printouts are of uneven density
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the
toner cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
Printouts are too light
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may
be very low.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
The drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.
The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
ABCDE
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
5.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Printouts have irregularities
Printouts have toner smudges
The paper you re using may have absorbed moisture, per-
haps due either to high humidity or water having been
spilled on the paper supply. Toner will not adhere well to
wet paper.
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the toner
cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace
the cartridge.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ACDE
ABCDE
Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage. If the
problem persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as
indicated.
If you find smudges on the back of the printouts, the trans-
port roller may be dirty.
Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automat-
ically. If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized
Muratec dealer.
Printouts have white and/or black lines
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage.
If the problem persists, replace either or both of the car-
tridges as indicated.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
The LED print head may be dirty.
Using the cleaning paper, gently clean the LED print head.
Printouts have white spots
The charger may be dirty.
The charger may be dirty.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized
Muratec dealer.
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized
Muratec dealer.
5.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Troubleshooting
Occasionally, your fax machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving
documents. When it does, it alerts you with an alarm. You can identify the problem
with LCD messages and printed check messages and error reports, explained in the
following pages.
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Ch a n ge to Fa x Mod e
You tried to to store the document for polling (or
for F-Code Box) when the machine is in the
Copy mode. You can store the fax document only
when the machine is in the Fax mode.
Ch eck Mem or y Tx
You tried to turn the Fax&Copy feature ON, but
the memory transmission setting is OFF. To use
the Fax&Copy feature, the memory transmis-
sion setting must be set to ON.
Alarm
Your fax machine sounds an alarm tone a series of short beeps if either of
these two problems occur:
Set the Memory Tx to ON, then try again.
Trouble transmitting or receiving
The machine is out of paper
Ch eck Pa p er Size
Op en &Close Top Cover
The difference sized paper which is not same
sized paper you told your machine is loaded.
Set correct sized paper or change the paper size
setting (see page 1.9 1.10).
LCD error messages
What you see on the LCD
Close Sca n n er Cover
Close Top Cover
The cover indicated on the LCD is open or has
not been closed securely. Close it properly.
What it means/What to do
All Com m a n d s In Use
Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible
delayed commands (automatic redialing counts
as one) stored in memory and cannot accept
another. Wait until your fax has completed one of
the delayed commands or delete an existing
command by using REVIEW COMMANDS.
Close 1st Sid e Cover
Close 2n d Sid e Cover
Close 1st Ca ssette
Close 2n d Ca ssette
The paper cassette indicated on the LCD is open
or has not been closed securely. Close it properly.
Com m u n ica tion Er r or
A communication error disrupted the reception
or transmission. If you were transmitting, press
STOP to clear the error message and then re-try
the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try
to contact the other person and have him/ her re-
try the transmission. (The problem may be
Alr ea d y Stor ed
You tried to enter the same fax (or phone) num-
ber which is already entered in your fax
machine.
Enter a different fax (or phone) number.
Box In Use
You tried to erase a F-Code box which contains
at least one document.
Erase the document(s), then try again.
entirely with his/ her machine, phone line, etc.)
Cop y Off
You tried to change your fax machine to the copy
mode, but the unit s copy protection feature
(page 2.18) is on, preventing such use. Turn off
copy protection.
Ca ll For Ser vice
The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable.
Make repeated copies to help evaporate any
internal moisture. If that doesn t resolve the
problem, call your authorized Muratec dealer or
Muratec Customer Support.
Dep a r tm en t Cod e F u ll
You tried to enter department code more than
100. Your machine can store up to 100 depart-
ment codes.
5.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Docu m en t F u ll
You tried to enter an document into an F-Code
box, but the machine has reached its capacity
(30 documents). Delete documents stored in
F-Code boxes until the machine will let you pro-
ceed.
Ha n g Up P h on e
The optional handset is off-hook.
Hang it up, making sure the upper part of the
handset presses down on the h ook button.
In Rela y Box
You tried to store a document for polling in an
F-Code box which is set to be a relay box.
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin
box, then try again.
Docu m en t J a m
Con tStor En ter /Ca n cl
An original document jam while you are using
the ADF for either faxing or copying. See page
5.1 for instructions on clearing the jam.
In Secu r e Box
You tried to store a document for polling in an
F-Code box which is set to be a security box.
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin
box, then try again.
Docu m en t Stor ed
En ter No. (0-32)
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at
least one document. Erase the document(s), then
try again.
You tried to enter a call group number greater
than 32. Your machine can maintain 32 call
groups, numbered 1-32 (call group 0 covers all
the groups). Determine the correct call group
identifier number and enter it, instead.
In Use in P On eTou ch
You tried to erase the F-Code box or Batch box,
which is programmed in the programmable one-
touch key.
Erase the programmable one-touch key that con-
tains the F-Code box or Batch box you want to
erase, then try again.
En ter No. (000-255)
If the optional NIC (network interface card) is
attached to your machine, and you tried to enter
a TCP/IP address greater than 255.
In va lid I.D. Cod e
In va lid Nu m ber
In va lid Pa p er Size
The F-Code box
Try re-entering your F-Code box
I
.
D. code you entered isn t valid.
D. code.
I
.
Enter the correct TCP/ IP address.
You pressed a key which has no function during
the current operation.
En ter Red u ce/En la r ge
You tried to copy your document on the paper
other than Letter, Legal or Half letter sized
paper using the bypass tray, or the calculated
reduction or enlargement ratio is out of the
acceptable range (50 200 %) when the copy
reduction or enlargement ratio is set to Auto .
Enter the reduction or enlargement ratio manu-
ally although a part of the image might be
lacked, or change the paper for copying.
If the optional printer controller is attached to
your machine, it can use the special sized paper
with the bypass tray. However, it should be used
only for the PC printing, it cannot be used for
copying. So, if you tried to copy onto the special
sized paper with bypass tray, this message will
appear.
In va lid Pa sscod e
Lin e Bu sy
The protection passcode you entered isn t valid.
Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-
tion passcode.
En ter Sca n Size
Feed er In Use
When you using the FBS (Flatbed scanner)
glass, you must manually enter the scan size of
your document. Press DOCUMENT SIZE to choose
the size.
You tried to erase a document which someone is
polling from your machine. Wait for the fax to
complete the polling operation, then try again.
The command you re trying to enter requires the
use of the ADF, which is already in use. Wait for
the machine to stop using the ADF, then try
again.
5.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Ma cr o In Use
You tried to change the function for a Soft key,
but that Soft key has been programmed in a
Macro key. You cannot change the Soft key func-
tion until erase the Macro key that contains the
Soft key you want to change. Erase the Macro
key, then try again.
No Pa sscod e
You tried to program a security feature (see
page 3.50), but there s no protection passcode
stored in your fax machine. Store a protection
passcode in your machine, then retry again.
No P IN Nu m ber
You selected Mode1 in the PIN mask feature
and tried to call an autodialer number in which
no PIN has been entered, or to call using
numeric keypad without PIN. Enter a PIN, then
try again.
Mem or y Over flow
Sta r t Or Ca n cel
During transmission (or copying), you tried to
enter more pages into memory than your fax
could store. Press START to tell your fax to keep
as many pages in memory as possible, or press
CANCEL to delete from memory all pages stored
during this operation (but not previous opera-
tions).
No Rep or t
You requested an activity journal or confirma-
tion report, but your fax machine has no record
of any fax jobs having occurred.
No Ton er Ca r tr id ge
Not Allow ed in Ma cr o
Oth er Key Settin g
The toner cartridge is missing or has not been
properly installed in your fax machine. Please
properly install the toner cartridge.
Mir r or Ca r r ia ge Er r or
The mirror carriage of your machine has become
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer
or Muratec Customer Support.
During macro registration, you pressed the key
which cannot be registered in Macro, such as
Monitor/Call key or Security Reception key.
Mir r or Lock ed
No Com m a n d
The transport mode is not turned off.
Turn off the transport mode (see page 1.8).
You pressed REVIEW COMMANDS to review
upcoming commands, but your fax machine had
none stored.
You tried to enter the same function which is
already stored in other Soft key.
Store the different function.
No Dep a r tm en t Cod e
You tried to turn on the department code setting
but there are no department codes stored in
your fax machine. Store at least one department
code, then try again.
Op en Top Cover
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er
The paper is jammed in your fax machine.
Open the cover indicated on the LCD, and
remove the jammed paper carefully.
Op en 1st Sid e Cover
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er
. . . or . . .
You entered incorrect department code at fax
sending while the department feature is on.
Enter correct department code.
Op en 2n d Sid e Cover
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er
Op en Top /2-Bin Cover
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er
No Docu m en t Stor ed
No Dr u m
You tried to print a document from memory, but
your fax machine had none stored.
Rem ove Byp a ss Pa p er
Op en &Close Top Cover
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been
properly installed in your fax machine.
Please properly install the drum cartridge.
Op en &Close Sca n Cover
Reset Docu m en t
Either your document wasn t inserted correctly,
or the fax to which you re sending can t handle
the document s page length. Reset the page and
try again.
No Nu m ber Stor ed
You selected an autodialer, batch box or F-Code
box number for which there is no fax (or phone)
number programmed. Either choose another
number or dial a phone number directly from the
numeric keypad.
P lea se Ca ll Ser vice
The printer unit of your fax machine has become
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer
or Muratec Customer Support.
5.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
P lea se Su p p ly Pa p er
The paper cassette or bypass tray is out of
paper. Supply paper to the cassette and/ or the
bypass tray.
Secu r ityRx is Off
You tried to turn the security reception ON using
a Soft key which is assigned to set the security
reception to ON or OFF, but security reception
setting has not set to on.
To turn on or off the security reception using a
Soft key, first set the security reception setting to
on. (See pages 3.50 3.51.)
P lea se Wa it
Your fax machine s printer is either warming up
or busy. Please wait until the fax is finished
printing and then re-try your command or opera-
tion.
Select Pa p er Size
You tried to make a copy in the following condi-
tions:
Paper size selection is set to Auto .
The bypass tray has the paper other than
Letter, Legal, Half-letter.
Paper cassette(s) runs out of paper.
Press PAP ER SIZE to select your desired paper.
Pollin g In Use
You tried to store the polling document in your
fax machine, where one already had been
stored. Wait for the fax to complete the regular
polling operation or delete the stored document,
then try again.
P r in ter In Use
The command you re trying to enter requires the
use of the printer, which is already in use. Wait
for the fax to finish printing, then try again.
Su b-a d d r ess In Use
You tried to enter a sub-address identical to one
already being used in another F-Code box. Enter
a different sub-address.
P r otect Doc. Stor ed
A received document was in your fax s memory
when you tried to turn off the security reception
passcode. Print the received document from your
fax s memory, then retry the desired operation.
TONER ALMOST EMP TY
50 P RINTS REMAIN
Your machine is almost out of toner. About 50
more sheets can be printed, but please contact
your authorized Muratec dealer soon to purchase
a new toner cartridge if you don t already have
one.
Ra tion m u st be 100%
You cannot set the magnification ratio in
Negative/Positive copy or Ultra copy mode.
Set the magnification ratio to 100 % to use the
Negative/ Positive copy or Ultra copy mode.
TONER EMP TY
P RINTER NOT USABLE
Your toner cartridge is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge. Your machine cannot
print until it is replaced with a new toner car-
tridge.
REP LACE DRUM SOON
500 P RINTS REMAIN
Your machine can print about 500 more sheets,
but your drum will need to be replaced soon.
Please contact your authorized Muratec dealer to
purchase a new drum cartridge if you don t
already have one.
Too Ma n y Ch a r a cter s
Too Ma n y Loca tion s
You attempted to enter too many numbers or
other characters in the current operation.
Press CANCEL to delete the extra characters, then
try again. You may wish to review the operation s
appropriate instructions.
REP LACE DRUM UNIT
P RINTER NOT USABLE
Your drum cartridge doesn t work.
Your machine cannot print until it is replaced
with a new drum cartridge.
Replace it.
You tried to enter too many numbers for a
broadcast. You can enter up to 200 autodialer
number and up to 30 numbers entered through
the numeric keypad.
Press CANCEL to delete the extra numbers and
then try again.
Sca n n er In Use
The command you re trying to enter requires the
use of the scanner, which is already in use. Wait
for the fax to complete the scan, then re-try the
desired command.
5.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Errors
Too Ma n y Step s
You tried to enter too many steps for a macro.
You can enter up to 60 steps into a macro key.
When sending faxes, your machine occasionally runs into communications errors.
These can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference.
(These same factors cause the static, or line noise, you sometimes hear on phone
calls.) They also can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of
the line.
Un a ble to Red u ce
In the reduction copy using the ADF, if the
calculated ratio is smaller than minimum reduc-
tion ratio (50%), this message will appear and
you cannot make the reduction copy.
Use the FBS glass, however parts of the image
might not be copied.
Often, simply trying your call again is all that s necessary. However, if the problem
persists regularly, call your local telephone company for help. If that doesn t help and
the problem persists regularly, call your authorized Muratec dealer.
Use F BS Gla ss
You tried to enlargement copy using the ADF.
Your machine cannot enlargement copy from the
ADF. Please set your document on the FBS glass
to make the enlargement copy.
Error reports
When an error occurs, your fax machine prints an error report. Each fax error report
lists an error message which includes:
A possible solution to the problem
The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID of its own)
The result w h i ch is a special error code.
A sample of the document s first page.
Kinds of error codes
The error code listed in the Result column of the error report indicates the specific
problem encountered:
D
R
T
codes Occur while dialing
codes Occur during reception
codes Occur during transmission
Specific errors
Following are some error codes you may see on an error report:
Dialing errors
D.0.3, The remote unit didn t respond, the call couldn t be completed or STOP was
D.0.8 pressed during dialing. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message,
call the remote fax unit s operator and verify that unit is operating properly.
D.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.
D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn t respond, the call somehow didn t go through or
D.0.7 STOP was pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
5.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Reception errors
T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions
can change rapidly, so try the call again later.
R.1.1 The calling fax machine didn t respond to your fax machine. This can hap-
pen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts
access through use of a passcode.
T.3.1
The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error dur-
ing transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try
the call.
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, page 5.18) fax communication, the
industry standard since the early 1980s.
T.3.2
The fax machine didn t detect the silence indicating the call had ended.
T.4.1 The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of excessive
modem errors or because remote unit ran out of paper. Try the call again.
R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the receiving fax machine.
T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again.
R.1.5 The fax machine didn t detect the silence at the end of the call for receiving
an RCR.
T.4.4
Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Try the call again.
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call some-
T.5.1, ECM transmission failed (perhaps due to line noise). Conditions can change
T.5.2, rapidly, so try the call again later.
one at the remote machine s location.
T.5.3
R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving
fax machine.
T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem
during transmission.
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn t complete the equalizer training phase.
R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from prop-
erly printing some or all of the pages it received.
R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax
machine needs maintenance.
R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.
R.5.1, ECM reception failed (perhaps due to line noise).
R.5.2
R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
Transmission errors
T.1.1 The remote fax machine didn t respond to your machine. Call someone at the
remote machine s location.
T.1.2 Your fax machine s page counter detected a possible document feeder error.
Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again.
T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communica-
tion became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again.
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, page 5.18) fax communication,
the industry standard since the early 1980s.
5.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Check Message printouts
When there s a problem with a fax call and your machine detects an error, it pro-
duces an error printout headed by the words Check Message. This printout lists
the following information about the transmission:
The resulting error code
A communications error message (see What error messages can mean, below)
The phone number (or TTI, if programmed) of the fax machine with which your
machine had attempted to communicate.
What error messages can mean
The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things.
Here s a brief summary:
Er r or m essa ge
Possible m ea n in gs
Check condition of remote fax. Remote machine malfunctioned
N o handshake signals from remote fax
Wrong phone number reached
Repeat transmission.
Poor phone line conditions
N o handshake signals from remote fax
Document misfeed or miscount
Unable to reach remote machine after
attempting specified number of redial tries
Line is busy.
Remote machine s line was busy
Remote machine s line didn t answer
Check received documents.
Remote confirmation signal not received
from remote fax
Poor line conditions caused a poor image
Memory full.
Remote fax s memory is full
Dialing number is not set.
Stopped.
Stored phone number failed to dial properly
Someone pressed STOP at the remote fax
in the middle of the handshake
5.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Caring for your fax machine
With proper installation and a little maintenance, your fax machine should give you
dependable service for years to come.
Corrective cleaning
Here are some simple cleaning procedures for keeping your fax machine operating
smoothly. Use each as the need arises.
Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to
keep it in top form:
Alw a ys make sure your fax machine is installed according to our specifications,
including using an electrical surge suppressor. (If necessary, review P ick an
installation spot, page 1.5.)
Curing frequent jams in the ADF
If you re having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly, try
this procedure:
Alw a ys use good, copier-quality paper.
Turn off your fax machine.
Alw a ys clean your fax machine as needed (see Cleaning tips, below).
1
2
Never install your fax machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get
splashed by any liquids (even water).
Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:
One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers. In steps 4 and
6, we ll call this the rollers cleaner.
The other with isopropyl alcohol
Cleaning tips
Open the scanner cover by holding the scanner cover release.
Some things to keep in mind about cleaning your fax machine:
3
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover open. It won t stay open by itself.
Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the fax machine s air vents can
shorten your machine s life.
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to clean the face of the rollers. Rotate
the rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the entire roller surface.
4
Alw a ys unplug the fax machine before you clean it.
Never spr a y a n y clea n er DIRECTLY on to you r fa x m a ch in e. The drifting
spray could damage components inside.
Never tr y to clea n SEALED a r ea s in sid e you r fa x m a ch in e. They re sealed to
protect your safety and the machine.
For cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover and handset: use a mild clean-
ing solution sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.
Alw a ys use a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with alcohol to gently wipe
components inside your machine.
In areas you can t reach with swabs, a lw a ys use dry, dust-free compressed air to
gently blow away dust and other material.
5.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality
Open the inner cover fully.
5
6
Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items which
are very important to printout quality. So, if you notice poor printout quality
(whether on received faxes or on copies), it may mean that your machine requires
service. Review Print quality problems (pages 5.3-5.4), and see whether any of the
proposed solutions helps your machine. If none do, please call your authorized
Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer Support Center at (800) 347-3296
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover open. It won t stay open by itself.
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to
clean the face of the rollers. Rotate the
rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the
entire roller surface.
(from the U.S. only)
.
Cleaning the LED print head
If you find your fax recipients complaining that the faxes you receive or copy image
quality are streaked, the LED print head may be dirty.
Im p or ta n t: Be careful not to put your hand between the top cover and the
Cleaning the FBS glass, Contact glass and white pad
machine.
Open the platen cover.
1
Turn off your fax machine.
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol.
1
2
2
Im p or ta n t: Make sure the cloth doesn t have any rough areas. Otherwise, it
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it
with isopropyl alcohol.
could scratch the glass surface of the FBS.
Using the cloth, gently clean the FBS glass, contact glass and the white back-
ground area on the underside of the platen cover.
3
Open the top cover and then open the
printer cover.
3
Im p or ta n t: The fuser unit becomes
very hot. Do n ot touch
the fuser unit when you are cleaning the LED print head.
Using the cloth, gently clean the LED print head.
4
Note: Do n ot use abrasive materials on the LED print head, and d o n ot
subject the LED print head to strongly shock.
5.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Common questions
Sending faxes
Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using either the optional handset or the
MONITOR/CALL feature. But, when the other side answers, I hear a horrible
screeching sound, so I hang up. What s happening?
We re here to help you!
The Muratec Information System is available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week. You can use your fax machine to call this fax-on-demand system and
receive printouts of information, such as the most common questions asked
about your machine. Often, this is the fastest way to find out the answer to
any question you may have. And it s a free call!
A: That was the other fax machine trying to say H ello to your machine! You ll
hear sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer
automatically (as when you set your machine to Auto Answer mode). It s by
using these tones that fax machines are able to send faxes over ordinary phone
lines. So, next time you hear the tones, press START (and, if you re using an
optional handset, hang up) to send a fax.
To use the Muratec Information System:
On your fax machine, press MONITOR/CALL to get a dial tone, or lift
your optional handset.
1
Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machine s display
Call 1-800-215-1698.
2
3
during the transmission wasn t the number I dialed. Why?
Follow the voice instructions you ll receive from the system.
A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.
Some users prefer different numbers to appear than the ones they re really
using. And some people don t know how to change the number once it s set.
General questions
Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machine s printouts darker?
Q: Can I transmit and receive at the same time?
A: No. Use the call request feature (see pages 3.25 3.26) to ask the person at the
remote fax machine if he or she wants to transmit or receive after your fax
communication is complete.
A: You can t adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust
the darkness of a copy or of a transmission. Insert a document and press CON-
TRAST to adjust the contrast setting. Da r k prints at the darkest setting. The
machine will reset automatically to normal contrast after you finish copying or
sending the fax.
Q: Do I have to dial a 1 for a long-distance call?
A: Yes. Dialing a fax number is just like dialing any other phone number, so be
sure to include any special long-distance codes or dialing pauses when dialing.
Also, remember to include them when you set your autodialer numbers.
Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off, will I lose the information
I ve stored such as my TTI, autodialer entries, the time and date, etc. a n d
have to re-enter them?
A: No. There s a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user
settings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.
However, we do advise you to restore power to the machine as soon as possible.
Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?
A: Dialing requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local
telephone company s requirements. For most international calls, call 011, then
dial the appropriate country code, city code and phone number. (You may find
country and city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)
Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?
A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to over-
heat.
Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?
A: Yes, but confirmation reports (see page 3.22) aren t available when you trans-
mit without recording paper in your fax machine.
5.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Q: The specifications (page AI.1) list an average per-page transmission time, but
Q: Can I transmit a document that s extra long?
when I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?
A: Yes, if the receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many
machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documents that
exceed the normal length.
A: We base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test docu-
ment called ITU-T Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the Slerexe letter ).
Fax manufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:
Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?
The pages you send may be darker, or otherwise contain more information,
than ITU-T Test Document 1.
A: No. A newspaper page can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copy
machine to make an appropriately sized copy of the newspaper page, then
transmit the copy.
The transmission time measured for test documents doesn t include hand-
shake time the time during which two fax machines introduce
themselves to each other and agree on the parameters of the call.
Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?
The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You
may be using fine, superfine or grayscale transmission, each of which takes
longer than normal mode.
A: Yes, but only if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.
Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?
Q: What s a default?
A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see
A: A default is a setting that your machine will always refer to if nothing else is
programmed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a
fax by using its memory. If you set this action as the default, that s how your
machine will always send a fax, until you tell it to do differently.
pages 3.23).
Q: I don t want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so I ve con-
nected the machine to a PBX phone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones
ring. How do I prevent this?
A: Call your PBX manufacturer or telephone company for assistance. They may be
able to convert one of the PBX lines for use only by your fax machine.
Reports
Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using either the optional handset or
MONITOR/CALL, I don t hear the fax receiving tones from the other machine.
Am I doing something wrong?
Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my
transmit confirmation report (TCR). Why didn t the whole number appear? How
can I be sure my document went to the right location?
A: When this happens, try pressing START (and then hanging up the optional
handset if you re using it), as usual. It s possible you re calling an older, non-
standard fax machine that doesn t emit answering tones. Even a few Group 3
faxes (see Glossary, page 5.18) on the market sound a sending tone but don t
sound a receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other fax
machine s location to see if that person got your document.
A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a mem-
ory buffer , and it s only the last part of the phone number that the buffer
remembers. An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on
your printouts is to store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys
or speed-dial numbers. These autodialer numbers will appear in their entirety
on your TCR.
Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialed a fax number, but my machine
didn t transmit the document. Instead, ** Auto Redial ** now appears on
my LCD. What does this mean?
A: The remote fax machine was busy, so your machine will try the call again, auto-
matically. As long as it hasn t stored more than 99 delayed commands (counting
automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from you. If it
has exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try canceling one
of the delayed commands (see page 2.8). If the machine still won t cooperate,
keep canceling commands until it does.
5.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Receiving faxes
Q: My fax never answers. What s wrong?
Polling
Q: What s the purpose of polling?
A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working AC
power outlet and phone jack (see page 1.7). If you re using a second phone with
your machine, make sure it s connected properly (page 2.20).
A: Polling lets you automatically pu ll a document which is set in another fax
machine. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and don t
want the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the call and
get the information you need.
Q: Sometimes when I answer my machine with the optional handset, I hear a
beeping sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?
A: Yes. When you hear these fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next
How your fax machine works
How a fax machine works is simple:
time, press START and hang up the handset. Your fax will receive the message.
Q: Does my fax machine have to be plugged in to the AC power jack to receive a
You put a page into your fax machine s feeder and call a fax number. Your machine
makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, a n d t h en
message?
A: Yes. Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you can t receive a
fax unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the AC
power jack. Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never miss
an important fax message.
Your machine takes the document.
An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.
Your machine wraps the document.
Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and
compresses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.
Q: Can I receive a fax if I m using the phone on my machine?
Your machine sends the document.
Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.
A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom you re talking. When that per-
son has a document ready in his/her machine s feeder, press START.
On the other end of the line
The remote fax machine receives the code.
Working with your answering machine
Your machine unwraps the document.
The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a
representation of the scan your machine made.
Q: People have complained that they call my fax machine and hear my answering
machine s message, but are cut off before they can send a fax. What happened?
A: Any remote fax machine attempting to send a fax must h ea r responding fax
tones within 40 seconds after the person at that machine presses the start key.
That 40 seconds includes getting the dial tone, dialing the number, listening
to the pause before the ringing starts and the remote fax machine answering
the ring. Only after that time does your message play.
The remote fax machine prints the representation.
The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content of
the transmission:
That s why we urge you to create a short outgoing message. The shorter the
waiting period, the more likely it is that the remote fax machine will proceed
with the transmission. Please create an outgoing message on your answering
machine that s no longer than 10 seconds (see page 2.11 for a suggestion).
On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.
On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.
The way fax machines work is regulated closely by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU), an agency of the United Nations. The standards the
ITU applies ensure the compatibility of your fax machine with millions of other
machines worldwide. However, they also limit the way you can use your machine
with other devices, such as telephones and answering machines.
5.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Glossary
This glossary contains terms you may encounter when discussing or reading about fax
machines. Please use these definitions for reference only. A list of definitions can also be
found on the Muratec website at www.muratec.com.
Br oa d ca st
tion.
A fax transmission in which a single document is sent to more than one loca-
bp s Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because fax trans-
mission treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of alphabetic and
numeric characters, bps does not correspond to the number of characters transmitted per sec-
ond.
24-h ou r for m a t
Also called military format. A format for keeping time that does not use
a.m. or p.m. to distinguish between morning and afternoon. In the 24-hour format, one o clock
in the morning marks 1:00, noon marks 12:00 and midnight marks 24:00. To calculate the 24-
hour format, add 12 hours to all times after noon.
Byte
Ca ll r eser ve
request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.
A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.
Also called call request. An ITU-T standard fax feature which allows a user to
For example, 1:30 p.m. would be 13:30 in the 24-hour format; 10:45 p.m. would be 22:45 in the
24-hour format. And 11:15 a.m. would be 11:15 in the 24-hour format.
Ca ll-w a itin g ser vice
An optional telephone company service that alerts you to another
A3, A4, B4 Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards
Organization, an agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.
incoming call when the phone is already in use. Call-waiting signals often cause interruption
of fax transmission or reception.
ADF
Automatic document feeder. See document feeder.
The number your machine dials after all attempts to the regular
Ca ller ID Optional service provided by your local telephone company that allows you to
see a display of the number (phone or fax) that is calling.
Alter n a te n u m ber
number fail. The user programs this alternate number, if so desired.
CCITT S e e ITU-T.
An sw er in g m a ch in e S e e TAD.
CCD, CIS Charged coupled device, contact image sensor. Two types of scanning mechanisms
used in some Muratec fax machines. The CCD r ea ds fluorescent light bouncing off a docu-
ment. The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
Au tod ia lin g Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the unit s mem-
ory. Storage capability varies from unit to unit.
Com m a n d qu eu e
Com m a n d n u m ber
The list your machine keeps of all its pending commands.
Au tom a tic fa llba ck
nicating with another fax which is communicating at a slower rate.
The ability of a fax machine to slow down ( fall back ), when commu-
The number your machine gives to each job it is programmed to
complete. You must know the command number in order to cancel or change any of the
machine s jobs that it stores.
Au tom a tic r ed u ction Many Muratec fax machines will automatically reduce the size of
documents being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the receiving
unit. For example, this allows a fax machine with a 10″ (256 mm) scanning width to send an
image 10″ (256 mm) wide to a unit with an 8.3″ (210 mm) print width. The receiving fax
machine will receive a reduced-size printout of the complete image.
Com p a tibility
The term compatible describes the ability of separate things to function
together. Your Muratec fax machine features ITU-T Group 3 compatibility, the modern stan-
dard for worldwide communication.
Bit
The smallest unit of information in a computer. Some Muratec fax machines, which
Con fid en tia l tr a n sm ission S e e SecureMail.
Con fir m a tion r ep or t S e e RCR and TCR.
Con tin u ou s p ollin g S e e Polling.
are actually computers dedicated to telecommunications, allow users to change bits of infor-
mation to provide or cancel features through software settings.
Bits p er secon d S e e bps.
Cop y m od e
Allows your fax machine to be used as a convenience copier.
Bla ck d en sity
Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a page. For
Cover p a ge (a u tom a tic)
A small, user-created message; can be the first page of every
example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well under 10%, due to the
presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between lines and paragraphs and even
spaces within letters. However, drawings and photographs have a much higher black density,
sometimes approaching 100%. The higher a page s black density, the more slowly a fax
machine sends it.
transmission.
Da ta ba se p ollin g S e e Polling.
Da ta com p r ession Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also Digital
fax, MH and MSE, SMSE.
5.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Defa u lt
The setting your machine will always refer to if no other action has been pro-
Gr a ysca le Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting halftone
images. Fax machines with grayscale abilities interpret photographs in
levels of gray between white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have grayscale
ability to send a photographic image accurately, but the receiving machine does not need it to
print the image.
grammed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by using its
memory. If you set this action as the default, that s how your machine will always send a fax,
until you tell it to do differently.
Dela yed com m a n d
Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur later, auto-
matically, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making fax calls during times
when telephone costs are lowest, such as late at night or on weekends.
Gr ou p 3 Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit one page
in less than one minute and produce resolution of 203 × 98, 203 × 196, or 406 × 392 lpi.
Digita l Using the binary system (which uses a combination of 0s or 1s) to describe every-
thing, so that 0 means off and 1 means on; digital fax machines convert the graphic image of
your document into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of transmission to
encode black and white occurrences. This increases transmission speed by passing over white
spaces. See also White-line skip.
Ha lfton e S e e Grayscale.
Ha n d sh a k in g
An exchange of data between telecommunications and/or
computer equipment that introduces two systems to each other. For example, faxes use a
handshaking protocol to identify the ITU-T group of each unit and to begin fax communication.
Hu b S e e Relay broadcasting.
Digita l fa x Unlike analog systems that scan every portion of a document, digital fax
machines survey a document s overall picture content. Digital fax machines scan a line and
convert the information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax machine takes this
information and compresses it, providing high transmission speeds. Many Muratec units
offer proprietary methods for faster transmissions between Muratec-manufactured units (see
also MSE, SMSE).
Hz (or Her tz) A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the specifica-
tions for a fax machine, it identifies the AC power the unit requires.
ITU-T In t er n a t ion a l Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Sector. (Formerly
known as CCITT, for Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone.) A
telecommunications forum for member countries of the United Nations whose Study Group
XIV established the primary groups for fax equipment, covering communication protocol and
transmission. Muratec Group 3 fax machines offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the
ITU-T when communicating with other Group 3 units.
DIP sw itch es Dua l in-line pa ckage switch; a two-position on/off switch. Many Muratec fax
machines include DIP switches to control optional settings or features.
Docu m en t feed er
The adjustable slot into which users place documents for faxing or
ITU-T Test Docu m en t 1
Also called the Slerexe ( slehr-rehks ) letter; An ITU-T standard
copying.
document with a known black density which fax makers often use to test transmission
speeds of their fax machines. Published transmission speeds are also based on this document.
Effective p r in tin g w id th
The widest image that can be printed on a fax.
Effective sca n w id th
mission.
The maximum width the scanner in a fax can scan during trans-
ITU-T V.29 a n d V.27 ter.
machines to talk to all other units adhering to those standards.
Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T standard image data compression
method. As J BIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when
transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.
A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax
F -Cod e
A fax-industry standard created by the ITU-T for sub-addressing/password-based
J BIG
communications. Because F-Code is an industry standard, Muratec fax machines as well as
all ITU-T equipped fax machines from other manufacturers can communicate with each other
using sub-addressing.
(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)
Fa csim ile (or fa x) A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding of a docu-
ment into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over telephone lines to another
device. This device then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact duplicate of the document.
Also, a machine that performs such communication.
La ser p r in tin g
A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged drum and
an image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then fused with heat
and pressure to produce a dry, permanent printout.
LCD Liquid crystal display. Used on some Muratec units for status displays.
Fa llba ck Gr ou p 3 fa x m a chines operate at the highest transmission speed possible on a
given telephone line. Muratec systems offer automatic fallback; if line quality drops during
transmission, the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest possible level.
Lea sed lin e S e e Private line.
Loa d n u m ber
A number assigned to telecommunications equipment used in Canada;
designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also Ringer equivalence num-
ber.
File n u m ber
A number the machine gives to each document it stores for a batch, F-Code
or polling operation.
Loca tion ID S e e Station ID.
Fin e r esolu tion 2 0 3H × 196V lpi. Also shown as
G
3
F
( Group 3 fine ) on some fax units.
lp i Lin es per in ch. The way fax image resolution is measured. (For example, see Normal
resolution.)
5.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Mem or y Internal document storage. In Muratec fax machines, random access memory in
the form of computer chips is used to store and hold documents for transmission and to hold
some documents that have been received.
Pa p er sizes
All are width × length:
Letter-sized = 8.5″ ×11.0″ (216 × 279 mm)
A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″ (148 × 210 mm)
A4 = 8.3″ ×11.7″ (210 × 297 mm)
A3 = 11.7″ ×16.5″ (297 × 420 mm)
Legal-sized = 8.5″ ×14.0″ (216 × 356 mm)
B5 = 7.2″ ×10.1″ (182 × 257 mm)
Mem or y over flow
A message that appears on the machine s LCD when the
B4 = 10.1″ ×14.3″ (257 × 364 mm)
current operation requires more of the machine s electronic memory than what is available.
Pa sscod e
A four-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection passcode lets the
MH Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-T Group 3 data compression method. A one-dimen-
sional coding scheme that compresses data in a horizontal direction only. A feature of all
Muratec fax machines, MH assures transmissions faster than one page per minute when com-
municating with other Group 3 units, regardless of
user limit access to fax operations, as well as certain settings and even documents readied for
polling (in the case of polling, only calling machines whose users enter the proper passcode
will be able to poll the document.)
manufacturer. See also MR, MMR, MSE, SMSE.
P BX (or PABX) P r iva t e br a n ch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment serving a
particular building, business or area. Many PBX systems use digital transmission lines which,
unlike more common PSTN lines, are not compatible with fax machine use. The user should
not connect a fax unit to a PBX without first checking with the system manufacturer or ser-
vice representative.
Milita r y for m a t S e e 24-hour format.
Mod em Modu la t or-demodulator. A device that converts digital data, like information from
a fax machine, into an analog signal for transmission over ordinary telephone lines. A modem
is included in a fax machine and allows it to be connected directly to a PSTN telephone line.
P CL
machines include or offer PCL-compatible printing for Windows-based personal computers.
P la ten A traditional copier-style top to a fax machine or digital copier. Some Muratec fax
Page Control Language. An industry standard for printer control. Some Muratec fax
MR Modified Rea d, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-dimen-
sional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions and
allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of
manufacturer. See also MH, MMR, MSE, SMSE.
machines and multifunctional products include a platen top, allowing you to fax from books
and other awkward sources.
MMR Modified Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-
dimensional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions
and allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless
of manufacturer. See also MH, MR, MSE, SMSE.
Pollin g
Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a document from a
remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a central unit must receive
information from one or several remote faxes. The caller bears all telephone charges and pre-
vents several remote units from calling at the same time. See also Secure polling.
Mon itor
A speaker in most Muratec fax machines which allows the user to hear the dial-
P r iva te lin e (O r leased line.) A service offered by many telephone systems; provides an
exclusive phone circuit between two geographic points. A Muratec fax does not require a pri-
vate line. See also PSTN.
ing process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for speaking to the
person being called. For regular two-way voice communication, users must use the optional
handset. See also On-hook dialing.
P r op r ieta r y Non -st a n da r d. In fax, refers to a fax feature which works only in communi-
cations between fax machines that are the same brand.
MSE, SMSE Mu r a t ec s proprietary data compression methods, allowing a Muratec-manufac-
tured fax machine to transmit more quickly when communicating with another
Muratec-manufactured unit. MSE and SMSE are features on many Muratec fax machines. See
also MH, MR, MMR.
P STN P u blic swit ched telephone network; the most common type of telephone lines and
service in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. A Muratec fax provides fast, reliable data
transmission over a PSTN line, and does not need a special or dedicated telephone line. See
also Private line.
Qu a d Accessfi Mu r a t ec s QuadAccess allows your Muratec fax machine to perform four or
more tasks simultaneously without slowing.
Nor m a l r esolu tion Sh own a s n or m ; 203H × 98V lpi. The default resolution mode for all
Muratec fax machines.
On e-tou ch d ia lin g
Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing
with the touch of one key. See also Autodialing and Speed-dialing.
RCR Receive confirmation report. An RCR is your assurance that the document you trans-
mitted was received. The RCR prints after your transmission, identifying the receiving unit
and recording the date, time, transmission mode, number of pages sent and the result. The
RCR is an exclusive feature of Muratec fax machines and is available only when transmitting
to other, compatible Muratec fax machines. See also TCR.
On -h ook d ia lin g Dialing numbers by using the keypad on the fax unit without lifting a
handset. On most Muratec fax models, the user can do this either silently or by using the
monitor. See also Monitor.
Or igin a l d ocu m en t size
The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed safely
through a fax machine.
Receiver ID S e e Station ID.
Over r id e
To change existing settings.
5.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
Red ia lin g
The dialing again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the most
Su p er Gr ou p 3
An extension of Group 3 fax technology standards, allowing the use of
recently dialed fax or phone number. Automatic redialing follows an unsuccessful dialing
attempt and can be done manually or automatically.
high-speed v.34 bis modems for 33.6 Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid
handshaking.
Rela y br oa d ca stin g Lets some Muratec fax machines store a document in internal mem-
ory, transmit the document to the memory of a remote h u b fax and then instruct that unit
to relay (re-transmit) the document to each fax in a call group in the h u b unit. This feature
speeds extremely high-volume fax communication and allows a single command to initiate
document transmission to hundreds of preprogrammed fax locations. It also saves phone
charges for the originating machine. Your machine can initiate a relay broadcast.
Su p er fin e r esolu tion 2 0 3H × 392V lpi. Your Muratec fax machine s superfine transmis-
sion mode is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary version.
TAD
Telephone answering device, or answering machine. Records incoming voice messages
for playback. You can connect a TAD to a Muratec fax machine and use the two on one phone
line.
TCR
Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your Muratec fax did send the
Rem ote fa x m a ch in e
The machine on the other en d of a fax communication.
document you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCR also identifies the
telephone number to which the fax sent the document, plus the actual time of transmission
and how many pages the unit transmitted. See also RCR.
REN S e e Ringer equivalence number.
Resolu tion
The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines is mea-
sured by the number of horizontal (H) and vertical (V) lines per inch (lpi) the unit can print. A
Muratec unit may offer one or more of these resolution levels:
Th er m a l (p a p er ) p r in tin g
A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally sensitive
paper in patterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, creating a printed
image. Thermal paper s tendency to discolor and fade, in addition to its curliness and the
usual difficulty in writing on it, have made this method considerably less popular than plain-
paper fax printing particularly as plain-paper fax machines have dropped sharply in price.
Normal
Fine
Superfine 203H × 392V lpi
203H
203H × 196V lpi
×
98V lpi
Tr iAccess Mu r a t ec s TriAccess allows a Muratec fax machine to perform three or more
tasks simultaneously without slowing.
Some Muratec units also offer grayscale transmission (see also Grayscale) for accurate repro-
duction of photographs and other shaded originals.
TTI
Transmit terminal identifier. A user-programmable line of information sent automati-
Rin ger equ iva len ce n u m ber
equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading on a telephone circuit.
See also Load number.
Also called REN. A number assigned to telecommunications
cally with every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each page printed by the
receiving unit.
Tr a n sm ission sp eed How fast a fax machine is sending a fax document. This speed
depends upon the modem speed of each unit, the resolution setting, the content of the docu-
ment, the encoding technique and the condition of the phone line (clean, noisy, etc.) Any
change in any one of these five conditions will affect the speed, sometimes significantly.
Sca n n in g w id th S e e Effective scanning width.
Secu r eMa il
Allows a Muratec fax user to send a document to or receive one into (usually
something confidential) an electronic mail box. The transmission is protected at the receiv-
ing Muratec fax by an access code; the receiving fax prints the document only when an
authorized user enters the code.
V.29 a n d v.27 ter
A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax machines to
talk to other units using those standards. Specifically, these standards cover fax transmission
at 9600 bps or slower.
Secu r e p ollin g
Polling in which preset passcodes are checked between two machines
before polling is allowed to take place.
V.34
An international standard for fax modems and other modems with transmission
Sp eed -d ia lin g
Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing with
speeds of up to 28.8 Kbps. The V.34 protocol is sometimes referred to as V.Fast , because it
represented a significant increase in possible transmission speed compared to the transmis-
sion protocol it replaced.
the touch of three keys an identifier key (either * or #) and then a three-digit code for
each number. See also Autodialing and One-touch dialing.
Sta tion ID (Also ca lled Location ID or Receiver ID.) An autodialer feature which lets the fax
user enter a descriptive name to correspond with the number in an autodialer entry. For
example, rather than entering only 1-972-555-3465, the user can enter that number and a
name, such as Dallas Branch Office. (Many Muratec models with this feature allow entry of
both upper-case and lower-case letters, for greater ease of reading.)
V.34 bis
A faster version of the V.34 standard, and sometimes referred to as V.34 Plus or
V.34 + . The V.34 bis protocol allows transmission at up to 33.6 Kbps, and represents the cur-
rent maximum standard transmission speed possible under ITU-T Group 3. (The term bis is
French, and designates the second version of the protocol.)
Wh ite-lin e sk ip
areas, such as white space.
A technique used to speed up fax transmission by bypassing redundant
Su ba d d r essin g
An ITU-T standard allowing fax machines to specify special delivery
characteristics of a transmission. For example, subaddressing allows fax machines from dif-
ferent manufacturers to send and receive messages into confidential memory mailboxes, or to
retrieve specific files from polling memory.
Su bscr iber ID
A fax machine s telephone number, as identified by a user setting. See TTI.
5.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ju st in ca se
This page intentionally blank.
5.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Specifications
Error correction mode:
Memory capacity:
Yes
Gen er a l
Type:
MF X-1200:
8MB (650 pages* approx.)
Upgrade Option:
Desktop plain paper facsimile
Compatibility:
MF X-1200:
ITU-T Group 3
MF X-1600:
ITU-T Group 3 and Super Group 3
plus 8MB (additional 680 pages* approx.)
MF X-1600:
8MB (650 pages* approx.)
Upgrade Option:
plus 8MB (additional 680 pages* approx.)
plus 24MB (additional 2040 pages* approx.)
Phone system:
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or
equivalent
Dual access:
One-touch dial:
Speed dial:
Multitasking
55 locations
145 locations
Memory backup time:
(Total memory capacity: Backup time)
8MB : 72 hours
16MB: 36 hours
32MB: 18 hours
(Must be charged for at least 24 hours to reach full
charge)
Op er a tin g En vir on m en t
Environmental temperature: 10” C to 32” C (50 F to 89.6 F)
Relative humidity:
20 to 80% RH
Polling/Broadcasting:
Transmission speed:
230 locations / 230 locations
MF X-1200: Approx. 6 seconds per page.**
Pow er r equ ir em en t:
Pow er con su m p tion :
Power: 120V AC 50/60 Hz.
MF X-1600: Approx. 2 seconds per page.**
MF X-1200
MF X-1600
Sleep mode
Standby
Maximum
:
:
16.0 W
17.3 W
19.0 W
21.2 W
1150 W
Docu m en t in p u t
Document set:
ADF :Face Up
FBS :Face down
: 1360 W
Com m u n ica tion
Coding method:
Original reference position:
Scanning resolution:
ADF :Center
FBS :Front right corner
ITU-T-standard MMR, MR, MH, J BIG (MFX-1600
only) and Murata-proprietary MSE.
(horizontal in dots/inch × vertical in lines/inch):
Modem speed:
MF X-1600:
MF X-1200
MF X-1600
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600,
19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800,
2,400 bps
Transmission:
Normal
Fine
203 98
203 196 203 196
203 98
Superfine
Grayscale
203 392 406 392***
203 196 203 196 (Memory Tx)
406 392*** (Real time Tx)
MF X-1200:
14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800, 2,400 bps
Copy:
MF X-1200: 300 300 dpi
MF X-1600: 400 400 dpi
AI.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Scanning method:
Scanning width:
Document size :
Flatbed CCD
Paper capacity:
Paper cassette; 500 sheets (60 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb)
Bypass tray; 50 sheets (60 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb)
8.2 inch (Fax), 8.5 inch (Copy)
Receiving paper tray capacity: 300 sheets (60 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb)
(width height)
ADF; single sheet:
Maximum 8.5 inches 35.4 inches,
Miscella n eou s
Weight:
Minimum
4.7 inches 3.9 inches
Approx. 51.4 lb (23.3 Kg)
ADF; two or more sheets :
Maximum 8.5 inches 14.0 inches,
Dimensions :
Width 20.1 Depth 19.4 Height 14.8 (inches)
Approx. 16,000 pages*****
Drum cartridge life:
Toner cartridge life:
Minimum
5.8 inches 4.1 inches
Approx. 8,000 pages*****
FBS
Maximum 8.5 inches 14.0 inches
50 sheets
ADF capacity:
* Using the ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine with normal resolution.
Document thickness:
30.2 104.7 g/m2, 13-24 lb (Single sheet)
** Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. Your
transmission times will vary, but your fax machine always will provide the fastest
transmission speeds possible under ITU-T guidelines and phone-line conditions.
52.3 80 g/m2, 13-20 lb (Two or more sheets)
Grayscale:
256-level
*** In the case that the remote fax has the ability of 406 dpi × 392 lpi .
If not, the superfine resolution is 203 dpi × 392 lpi , and the grayscale resolution in
real time transmission is 203 dpi × 196 lpi .
P r in tou t
Printer resolution:
Warm-up time:
First copy time:
600 dpi
**** The A4, A5, F4, A6, Executive, DL, CM10, Monarch and Postcard can be used only for
coping.
Less than 20 seconds at 68” F (20” C)
***** Based on 6% document coverage and letter-sized two-page interval printing.
MF X-1200: 12 seconds (using Letter-sized paper in
1st paper cassette)
MF X-1600: 10 seconds (using Letter-sized paper in
1st paper cassette)
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Paper exit system:
Printing method:
Face up exit system
LED scanning, Electrophotographic dry powered
image transfer to plain paper
Print speed:
MF X-1200: Up to 12 ppm (using Letter-sized paper in
1st paper cassette)
MF X-1600: Up to 16 ppm (using Letter-sized paper in
1st paper cassette)
Receive reduction print:
Copy reduce and enlarge:
Auto (Variable from 100% to 50% by 1% ratio)
Fixed (100%, 97%, 91%, 81% or 75%)
Variable from 50% to 200% by 1% ratio
Fixed (200%, 129%, 100%, 78%, 64% or 50%)
Smoothing print:
Yes
Printing paper size:
Paper cassette;
Letter, Legal, Half-letter
Bypass tray; ****
Letter, Legal, Half-letter, A4, A5, A6, F4, Executive,
DL, CM10, Monarch, Postcard (3.9 5.8 inches)
AI.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Regulatory information
If problems arise
United States of America
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remote it from your telephone
line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily
stop service. When practical, they will notify you before this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and will be
informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) information
Ringer Equivalence Number (RENs): MFX-1200: AC REN, 0.4B
;
DC REN, 0.3. MFX-1600: AC REN, 2.1B
;
DC REN, 0.3.
This facsimile machine has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A
digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a
residential installation.
In the event repairs are ever needed on your fax machine, they should be done by Muratec America, Inc., or an
authorized representative of Muratec America, Inc. For information, contact the Muratec Customer Support Center at
800-347-3296 (from the U. S. only).
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Canada
If this equipment causes interference in radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equip-
ment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Industry Canada (IC) regulations
IC RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN): MFX-1200: 0.3, MFX-1600: 0.7.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class
interference-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.
A
limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the
Cet appareil numØrique respecte les limites de bruits radioØlectriques applicables aux appareils numØriques de
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among
other information, the FCC registration number and REN for this equipment. If so requested, you must provide this infor-
mation to the telephone company.
Classe
A
prescrites dans la norme sur le matØriel brouilleur: Appareils NumØriques, NMB-003 ØdictØe par le Ministre
des Communications.
Notice: The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements.
The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction.
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be
connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part-68-compliant.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.
Sometimes, the company s inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended with a certified
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with these conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Telephone company procedures
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally
have to make changes in its equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the oper-
ation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the
supplier. Any equipment malfunction, or repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the
telephone company will provide this information upon request.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you about the
equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC
registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment which is connected to your line. Both
of these numbers are listed on the equipment label attached to your fax machine.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines
and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in
rural areas.
Ca u tion : Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric
The sum of all RENS on your telephone line should be fewer than five (5) in order to assure proper service from the tele-
phone company. Sometimes, a sum of five (5) may not be usable on a given telephone line.
inspection authority or electrician.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number
of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combi-
nation of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5. The IC REN
for your equipment is 0.3 (MFX-1200), 0.7 (MFX-1600).
Note:
This equipment is hearing-aid-compatible (HAC).
Notice: The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains,
either in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the
date and time it was sent and an identification of the business or other identity, or other individual sending
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, entity or individual. For
instructions on programming this information (the TTI ) into your fax machine, see pages 1.18 1.19.
Type of service
Your fax is designed for use on standard-device telephone lines. The fax connects to the telephone line with a standard
line called the USOC RJ -11. Connection to telephone-company-provided coin service (central-office-implemented systems).
Connection to party line service is subject to State tariffs.
AI.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Limited warranty
T
his warranty is made by Muratec America, Inc. (hereafter referred to as Muratec ). This warranty is
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE, AND EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW
MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF
DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE), AND MURATEC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN. IN THE
EVENT THE PRODUCT IS NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE, THE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MURATEC BE LIABLE TO THE CUS-
TOMER, OR TO ANY USER, FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,
LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE MURATEC
PRODUCT, EVEN IF MURATEC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, and some
States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclu-
sions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from State to State.
,
MURATEC
valid only on Muratec products purchased and used in the United States of America. This warranty
applies to the product only while owned and used by the original purchaser ( Customer ). If ownership of
the product is transferred, this warranty terminates. This warranty does not apply to any product in use
for rental purposes.
This Muratec product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for ninety (90) days com-
mencing the da te of origina l Customer purcha se. If the product is defective in ma teria l a nd/or
workmanship (normal wear and tear excepted) during the warranty period, Muratec or its authorized rep-
resentative will, during Muratec s established service availability hours, make necessary adjustments and
repairs, including, at Muratec s option, installation of replacement parts. Muratec s service availability
hours are 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Central time) Monday through Friday, excluding Muratec-recognized holi-
days. Muratec will complete the necessary adjustments and repairs within a reasonable time period, as
dictated by the nature of the problem and by Muratec s service schedule. Replacement parts may have
been used and/or reconditioned. Parts that have been replaced will remain the property of Muratec. This
warranty is subject to the OBLIGATIONS and EXCLUSIONS set forth.
A
Obligations
1. This warranty will be honored only on presentation of the original dated authorized Muratec bill of sale
or Muratec dealer bill of sale or sales slip to an authorized Muratec service representative or service
center. For the name of your authorized service center, contact Muratec (from the United States, call
1-972-364-3350; from Canada, check your in-box materials for the number to call).
2. During the warranty period, the Customer must notify Muratec by telephone of any defective product
material and/or workmanship.
3. Transportation (including prepayment of freight and insurance charges) of the product to and from an
authorized service center, designated by Muratec, is the responsibility of the Customer.
4. If Muratec provides maintenance or responds to a call which is outside the scope of this warranty, such
maintenance shall be billed to the Customer at Muratec s then-current rates for maintenance and
parts and shall be due and payable in full upon receipt of invoice.
Exclusions
1. This warranty shall not cover a product with missing or altered original identification marks.
2. This warranty applies only to products that the purchaser has properly installed, adjusted and oper-
ated in accordance with the instructions set forth in or provided with product literature. This warranty
does not apply to any product which has been subjected to tampering, alteration, misuse, abuse,
neglect, improper installation or transportation damage. Nor does it apply to costs for any service
requested for demonstration or to confirm proper operation of this product.
3. The warranty shall not apply to adjustments, repairs or replacements necessitated by any cause
beyond the control of Muratec (whether foreseeable or not) including, but not limited to, any malfunc-
tion, defects or failure caused by or resulting from any of the following: improper unpacking or
installation, unauthorized service or parts, or improper maintenance or cleaning, modification or repair
by the Customer, accident (including, without limitation, unavoidable accidents), fire, flood or other
Acts of God, improper telephone or electrical power or surges thereof, interconnection with or use of
non-compatible equipment or supplies (including paper), or placement of the product in an area which
does not conform to Muratec space, electrical and/or environmental requirements.
4. Muratec will not be required to make adjustments, repairs or replacements if the product is installed or
used at a location deemed by Muratec to be hazardous to health or safety, or if Muratec is not provided
with free and reasonable access to the product and a telephone during service availability hours, or if
the product location is not accessible by an authorized Muratec service vehicle.
AI.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Index
Combine (MFX-1600 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Copy auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Negative/Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
A
AC power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
AC power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Advanced functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
ALARM light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
dialing characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
one-touch dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
speed-dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
for dialing
Pause length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
for operation
2-bin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Primary standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
for reception
Half-page reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Image rotation (MFX-1600 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Print reduction rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Reduction margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
B
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
creating or modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
erasing a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
storing a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
Block numbers list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 3.10
reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
for transmission
ECM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Primary contrast mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Primary resolution mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
TTI transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Print your settings
Copy settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Fax settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Machine settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
COMM. light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Communication problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Troubleshooting
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Image contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Multiple copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Copy Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Reduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Reversing black and white areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Single copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Ultra copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
C
Call group dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Canceling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
review Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Changing the default settings
for copying
Auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Primary contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Primary document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Print margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
AI.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Using the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Phone type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
PIN mask feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Reduction margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Report type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Rx reduction rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
TTI transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Answering calls manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Canceling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Dialing pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
How to set the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
In real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Resolution, grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
using monitor/call key or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
using the FBS glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26, 3.30
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Erase Tx Doc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Overwrite Doc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Rx Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Creating or modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Erasing an empty F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
F-Code polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
F-Code transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
Printing a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
Relay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27, 3.33
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Select TTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26, 3.32
Document hold time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Function table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
COPY light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Copy setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17, 4.7
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Copy auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Copy protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Nega/Posi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Negative/Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Sort copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Ultra copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17, 4.8
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
D
Delayed command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Department code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Dialing characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Dialing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Document tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
DRD (distinctive ring detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.6
Dual access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See QuadAccess
E
EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Initial settings
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Extension paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
F
Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
FAX light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Fax setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Department code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Department code protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
Dialing pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
DRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Half-page reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Journal auto print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Journal line up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
AI.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
I
P
Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Passcode protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Acceptable paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Paper size stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Pause character, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
PIN masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Limiting polling access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Printer status lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Copy settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Fax settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Machine settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
J
Jammed paper, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
L
Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
M
Machine setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
2-bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Paper size of the 1st cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Paper size of the 2nd Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Paper size of the Bypass Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Primary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Alarm & Key Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Alarm Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Key Buzzer Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Ringer Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Printing a list of your Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
MEMORY RECEIVE light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Mirror carriage locking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Q
QuadAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
R
Real time transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.3
Reports, confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
RCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
TCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
S
O
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
Department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Adjust the monitor speaker s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Attach the paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
One-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Entering or changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
One-touch fax dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
One-touch phone dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Printing a list of one-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
One-touch labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
AI.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Pick an installation spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Turning off the transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Unlocking the mirror carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Soft Key labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3, 3.17
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Distinctive ring detection (DRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
F-Code Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1-AI.2
Speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Entering or changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Fax dialing via speed-dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Phoning via speed-dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Subscriber ID (your fax’s phone number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
T
Telephone line cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identifier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
U
Using the optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
W
Warranty, limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.4
AI.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|